Home

2012 Ram Truck 1500/2500/3500 Owner`s Manual

1. 618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx Windshield Wiper Blades 634 W Vehicle Storage uae ee ce Ono xs 663 Adding Washer Fluid iss 1054040049 634 W Replacement Bulbs 5 e 664 Exhaust Systemi audes aca Kado seas issus 635 W Bulb Replacement cxexcescaces xx cen 665 Cooling System 66 638 Dual Or Quad Headlamp Front Park And Brake System ils e eR Re eva 644 Tarn Signal W Equipped a acesiswew seas oe Rear Axle And 4X4 Front Driving Axle Fluid d LM ELLE id Level ut RUBER ERES ES 646 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup Transfer Case sse eser c e ene 648 id re 967 Automatic Transmission 648 CD CE a DE 669 Comes nnn OM egy POR Top Clearance Lamps If Equipped 671 MP Fuses 226 oso RR E Rs ane ea Ew 658 Bear Lamp Par D Markor Dual Rear Totally Integrated Power Module 658 Wheels If Equipped 672 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619 Side Marker Lamps Dual Rear Wheels If Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 676 i oe ipu cpun oe Engine eee eens 676 H Fluid Capacities 15i 9 x 674 Chassis L L L LLL 678 620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 7L 071005702 1 Air Cleaner Filter 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 Automatic Transmission Dipstick If Equipped 8 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 3 Engine Oil Dipsti
2. Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Zero call one cancel two confirmation prompts three continue four delete five dial six download seven edit eight emergency nine English star erase all plus Espanol pound Francais add location help all home ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s language return to main menu return or main menu list names select phone select list phones send mobile set up phone settings or phone mute set up mute off towing assistance new entry transfer call no Uconnect Tutorial other try again pair a phone voice training work yes phone pairing pairing phonebook phone book previous record again redial 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause
3. 174 TO ACHV ALE us ounce ew Xr ac es ee BS 175 To Set A Desired Speed psa cree rnes iia 176 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Deactivate To Resume Speed sssssn 176 To Vary The Speed Setting 176 To Accelerate For Passing 177 arksense Rear Park Assist If Equipped 177 Parksense Sensors serere cres pat irass 178 Parksense Warning Display 178 Parksense Display 04 4 179 Enabling And Disabling Parksense 182 Service The Parksense Rear Park Assist DYSIEM Soi ie Gh aee rub dead nda 63 183 Cleaning The Parksense System 184 Parksense System Usage Precautions 184 176 WiParkview Rear Back Up Camera If Equipped ssa earen et ne dew ee UE SU E 187 Turning Parkview On Or Off With Navigation Multimedia Radio 188 Turning Parkview On Or Off Without Navigation Multimedia Radio 189 ll Overhead Console If Equipped 189 Courtesy Reading Lights 190 ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 191 Before You Begin Programming Homelink9 5 iyi 95e vm Res 192 Programming A Rolling Code 193 Programming A Non Rolling Code 195 Canadian Gate Operator Programming 196 ee UNDERSTAN
4. TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 4 55 3x rnm Rr ttir IRR RR EUR ah shies E NEREAREN caer LR Roe e nin 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 ccc wc ccc eh hn nn 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE eee hn n la UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL cce eeee eee eee hh nnn 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 0 ccc ec ccc ccc cece eee hh hh 9 m hh nn 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2c cece cece cece cece hh hh hh hh hs 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2 cc ccc cece ccc c cece cence eee e ree eeeeeevees 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 2 cece cece cece cece cece cree eee eer e e mnn IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE cece cece eee c eer eee cece mnn 10 MIND EEX du ULL INTRODUCTION CONTENTS Mi Introduction 0 00 00 00004 4 WiVanConversions Campers 00 6 Bl How To Use This Manual 4 Vehicle Identification Number 6 Bl Warnings And Cautions 00 6 WH Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 4 INTRODUCTION Sas INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operatio
5. 245 W Electronic Vehicle Information Center E Switch Bank Button Description ae M E Upper Switch Bank 0 246 EMD ISDA e s rien sees Vara intet du Lower Switch Bank 00 246 i D dec Kun i DE 276 Bl Instrument Cluster Base 248 EU ARR RR 277 Bl Instrument Cluster Premium 249 Vehicle Info Bl Instrument Cluster Descriptions 250 Customer Information Features 278 Tire PSI peser artine on ee WEE 279 Units 224 do Prod nw as eae pene Padus 279 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Compass Temperature Display Customer Programmable Features System Setup 00 0 000000 lll Media Center 730N 430 430N RHR RER RBZ RHB CD DVD HDD NAV If Equipped s se cad re ERE RS Se Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped lll Media Center 130 Sales Code RES Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files 280 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode 297 ll Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio Sales Code RES RSC 0 0000 298 Operating Instructions Rad
6. U S Metric Cooling System 3 7L Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent oa 1a Luters 4 7L Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent ee Pues 5 7L Engine 1500 Models MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent etl pe 5 7L Engine 2500 3500 Models MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or 18 7 Quarts 17 7 Liters equivalent 5 7L Engine 2500 3500 Models w Heavy Duty MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile 19 2 Quarts 18 2 Liters Formula or equivalent 676 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE eee ee NNNM FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hy brid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil 5 7L Engine For 2500 Use API Certified SAE 5W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of 3500 trucks operating under a gross Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for combined weight rating greater correct SAE grade than 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs 3 7L Engine ZFR6F 11G Gap 0 043 in 1
7. 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se The Vehicle Security Alarm will also disarm if a pro grammed Sentry Key is inserted into the ignition switch To exit the alarming mode press the RKE trans mitter UNLOCK button or insert a programmed Sentry Key into the ignition switch The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previ ously described arming sequences has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Security System Manual Override The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Mirrors in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN from the OFF position NOTE e The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights do not turn off if the
8. 336 Controls iiu eevee seed eee RENE ES 337 Replacing The Batteries 338 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Warranty ssi ross ee es System Information 0 E Steering Wheel Audio Controls If Equipped 0 Radio Operation 00 CD Player 2er ee ete red BW CD DVD Disc Maintenance 1 mnn ll Radio Operation And Mobile Phones Mi Climate Controls liliis 355 Manual Heating And Air Conditioning SYSE s coast Reg es d exse at ds 356 Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped soe etr NOR bale de s 360 Summer Operation isis e e o n 365 Winter Operation 0 00000 ee 365 Vacation Storage 0 eee eee 366 Window Fogging And Frosting 366 Outside Air Intake 0 366 Operating Tips es spararata igras 367 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 040108708 1 Headlight Switch 7 115v Power Inverter Outlet 13 Transfer Case Position Switch 2 Instrument Cluster 8 Power Outlet 14 Ignition Switch 3 Radio 9 Lower Switch Bank 15 Hood Release 4 Upper Switch Bank 10 Cup Holders 16 Parking Brake Release 5 Upper Glove Compartment 11 Climate Controls 6 Lower Glove Compartment
9. HSA Off Non EVIC Equipped Vehicles If you wish to turn off the HSA system follow this procedure 1 Start with the engine OFF and the vehicle in PARK with the wheels straight 2 Start the engine 486 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 3 With the engine running and the brake applied rotate the steering wheel 180 counterclockwise from center 4 Press the ESC Off switch four times within 20 sec onds The ESC Off Indicator Light should appear and disappear four times 5 Rotate the steering wheel 360 clockwise 180 clock wise from center 6 Cycle ignition switch OFF then ON 7 If the sequence was completed properly the ESC Off Indicator Light will blink several times to confirm HSA is off Steps 1 through 7 must be completed within 90 seconds to turn off HSA Repeat steps 1 through 7 to re enable HSA functionality EVIC Equipped Vehicles HSA is a Customer Programmable Feature on a EVIC equipped vehicle If you wish to turn off the HSA feature refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Electronic Stability Control ESC If Equipped The ESC system enhances directional control and stabil ity of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer o
10. WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer en F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 703 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 ITY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercargov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should c
11. nut bolt circle and strike the high side down with a rubber mallet Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins are firmly seated around the wheel Wheel Nuts All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to elimi nate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated This is especially important during the first few hundred miles kilometers of operation to allow the wheel nuts to become properly set All wheel nuts should first be firmly seated against the wheel The wheel nuts should then be tightened to recommended torque Tighten the wheel nuts to final torque in increments Progress around the bolt circle tightening the wheel nut opposite to the wheel nut just previously tightened until final torque is achieved Recommended torques are shown in the fol lowing chart ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 601 Disc Wheels TypeNut StudSize Hex Size TorqueFt Lbs TorqueNewtonMeters Cone M14 x 1 5 22mm 120 150 160 200 Flanged M14 x 1 5 22mm 130 160 190 220 8 Stud Dual Rear Wheels Dual wheels are flat mounted and center piloted The lug nuts are a two piece assembly When the tires are being rotated or replaced clean these lug nuts and add two drops of oil at the interface between the hex and the washer Oiling Location 602 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Slots in the wheels will assist in properly orienting the inner and o
12. 634 Wipers Intermittent 0050 170 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehi cle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This con nection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accu racy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than nor mal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems U ram STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC Ii 12D241 126 AD 4th Edition
13. Driving Through Water Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only be attempted when necessary in a safe responsible manner You should only drive through areas which are designated and approved You should tread lightly and avoid damage to the environment You should know your vehicle s abilities and be able to recover it if something goes wrong You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested water into the engine air intake If the engine stalls do not attempt to restart it Determine if it has ingested water first The key to any crossing is low and slow You want to use first gear in 4L Low Range and proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed 3 5 mph 5 8 km h maximum and light throttle Keep the vehicle moving do not try to accelerate through the crossing After crossing any water higher than the bottom of the axle differentials you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion ee STARTING AND OPERATING 443 CAUTION Water ingestion into the axles transmission transfer case engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive too fast or through too deep of water Water can cause permanent damage to engine driveline or other vehicle components and your brakes will be less effective once wet and or muddy e Before You Cross Any Type Of Water As you approach any type of wa
14. ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631 WARNING Continued CAUTION e Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep e It is essential when replacing the cables on the flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage 632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants at the start of each warm season This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are test Drive belt tension should also be checked at t
15. 9 fo ii 12 Information Mode Video Screen Display 1 Channel 1 Mode 2 Channel 1 Shared Status 3 Channel 1 Audio Only Mute 4 Channel 2 Mode 5 Channel 2 Shared Status 6 Channel 2 Audio Only Mute 7 Channel 1 ENTER Button Action 8 Channel 2 ENTER Button Action 9 Clock 10 Video Lock 11 Not Available Error 12 Disc Changer Status UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341 Numeric Keypad Menu EH Input File L2 EV 4f WEATHER Preset 10 WEATHER HI The Weather Channel Bs Weather Channel DM Mother Nature s Numeric Keypad Menu When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2 shows DIRECT TUNE pressing the remote control s ENTER button activates a numeric keypad menu This 342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss screen makes it easy to enter a specific tuner frequency satellite channel or track number To enter the desired digit 1 Press the remote control s navigation buttons A V gt 4 to navigate to the desired digit 2 When the digit is highlighted press the remote con trol s ENTER button to select the digit Repeat these steps until all digits are entered 3 To delete the last digit navigate to the Del button and press the remote control s ENTER button 4 After all of the digits are entered navigate to the Go button and press the remote control s ENTER button Station List Menu When listening to Satellite audio pressing the
16. The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acci dents and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning 9 Light in the instrument panel for approxi N mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
17. Use only the manufacturer s recommended brake fluid information Using the wrong type of brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylin der reservoir Continued 646 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e To avoid contamination from foreign matter or e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons failure This could result in a collision the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine the brake fluid to catch fire B
18. direction the display will show 4 ERS 4 is direct gear Another tap down will 398 STARTING AND OPERATING shift the transmission down to ERS 3 the added under drive gear Once in ERS mode tapping ERS or will change the top available gear Console Shift Lever To exit ERS mode simply press and hold the shift lever to the right console shift or the ERS switch column Column Shift Lever shift until D is once again displayed in the shift lever position indicator in the instrument cluster ee STARTING AND OPERATING 399 WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing and accident or personal injury Screen Display 1 2 3 4 5 6 D Actual Gear s 1 1 2 1 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 5 Allowed 4 4 5 46 NOTE To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration engine braking simply press and hold the shift lever to the left console shift or the ERS switch down column shift The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive fourth and fifth gears The trans mission will automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if the following conditions are present e the shift lever is in the DRIV
19. 00005 Engine Oil Too Hot LoCOOL sorp aged een m Feds Low Engine Coolant 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss NOTE There is also an engine hour function This indicates the total number of hours the engine has been running To display the engine hours on the base cluster perform the following Place the ignition in the ON RUN but do not start the engine With the odometer value displayed hold the TRIP button down for a period of six seconds The odometer will change to trip value first then it will display the engine hour value The engine hours will be displayed for a period of 30 seconds until the ignition is turned OFF or the engine is started If equipped some of the above warnings will be dis played in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the instrument cluster Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped for further information ECO ECO ON Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped The ECO ON indicator will illuminate when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO ON depending on driving habits and vehicle usage Press the Odometer Trip Odometer ECO Fuel Saver Indicator button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings or the ECO display gASCAP If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
20. 2012 OWNER S MANUAL AM TRUCK GAS 1500 2500 3500 VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of acci dents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your per ceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or im provements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufac tured Copyright O 2011 Chrysler Group LLC
21. 376 Eluid Capacities ase seia RR REX Ra 674 Fluid Leaks llle 89 Fluid Level Checks Brake 22g ep kp ea aa EX aes 644 Power Steering sasea riata aaa a 477 Huid Brake 3 2e Ua Er aue 678 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 676 Fog Lights 2 sees n Fold Flat Load Floor lesssss Four Wheel Drive leen Four Way Hazard Flasher 714 INDEX ME Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 04 608 Front Axle Differential 0 646 Fuel 222122222 deb pb Rh e030 PS 531 Adding 2 hee RES ee 540 COnServinB desde dee ds e Xd d ed ag 276 277 Eihanol 2230444544 ERR der ERA 532 Filler Cap Gas Cap sssss 541 Gauge oss at eons dicendo UM du toe 250 Light 42 22 29 RE ERR En Re 259 Methanol 00 eee eee eee 532 Octane Rating llis 531 676 Requirements 00 0s sues 531 674 Saver Mode 0 02 dine wea die Ca eee aces 276 277 Tank Capacity aci sgo cee eee 674 Fuel Optimizer 6 0 2 eee 276 Fuel Saver is 24 24525550 Rh SERERE SY 276 Fuel System Caution 0 000000 540 Fuel Flexible sce RE qb RS RU e 536 lui says prp LL ML 658 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 191 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 541 623 Gasoline Fuel 0 0 0 0 ee eee 531 CONSELVINE uro Seg wa aa Stee eas 276 277 Gasoline Reformulated s 532 Gauges Coolant Temperature 20 250 Fuel 2e ERR C
22. If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing the sunroof press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move toward the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped is in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition O
23. The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag In this way the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB Inflator Units If Equipped The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags are de signed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Based on the severity and type of collision the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units If Equipped During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is gene
24. e Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information CAUTION If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead your Key Fob will become locked in the ignition Do not attempt to remove the Key Fob while in this condition damage could occur to the Key Fob or ignition module Only remove the emergency key for locking and unlocking the doors Leave the Key Fob in the ignition and either e jump Start the vehicle e Charge the battery brake shift the transmission into PARK and re move the key fob from the ignition When leaving the vehicle always lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Continued 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING Continued e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death CAUTION An
25. ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 655 Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights if equipped that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned
26. see notes about DVD Region Codes e DVD Audio discs 2 channel audio output only e Audio Compact Discs CDs e CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio format files e Video CDs MPEG 1 video compression es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345 DVD Region Codes The VES DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the player the disc will not play and will be ejected DVD Audio Support When a DVD Audio disc is inserted in the VES DVD player the DVD Audio title on the disc is played by default most DVD Audio discs also have a Video title but the Video title is ignored All multi channel program material is automatically mixed down to two channels which may result in a lowered apparent volume level If you increase the volume level to account for this change in level remember to lower the volume before changing the disc or to another mode Recorded Discs The VES DVD player will play CD R and CD RW discs recorded in CD Audio or Video CD format or as a CD ROM containing MP3 or WMA files The player will also play DVD Video content recorded to a DVD R or DVD RW disc DVD ROM discs either pressed or re corded are not supported If you record a disc using a personal computer there may be cases where the VES DVD player may not be able to play some
27. shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed E eS r gt 055703771 Tire Rotation 516 STARTING AND OPERATING Directional Tires If Equipped For the R T package with 22 tires amp wheels tire rotation must be performed with consideration of the tire rotation direction The recommended rotation pattern for direc tional tires is shown below ers C3 055710740 Tire Rotation Dual Rear Wheels If Equipped E ES EJ Tire Rotation The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in a set To check if tires are even lay a straight edge across all four tires The straight edge should touch all the tires 055740470 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 517 CAUTION 3500 Dual Rear Tires have only one approved direc tion of rotation This is to accommodate the asym metrical design tread pattern of the On Off Road tire and the use of Outline White Letter OWL tires e When replacing a flat the spare tire may have to be remounted on the rim or installed at a different location to maintain the correct placement of the tire on the wheel relative to the tire wheel position on the truck For example if the spare is used to replace an outer rear tire it will have to be re mounted on the rim so that the wheel is dished inward That way the tread design of asymme
28. 40 12 Wireless Ignition Node WIN IE Equipped ss cue se vase EE 12 Key HOD zii es edes a e e aos e Y dees 13 Removing Key Fob From Ignition 14 Key In Ignition Reminder 16 Monty Key END ane eee eee eees 16 Replacement Keys 000000 17 Customer Key Programming 18 General Information 0 18 Wi Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped 19 Rearming Of The System 19 To Arm The System 000050 19 To Disarm The System 19 Security System Manual Override 20 Bi Illuminated Entry If Equipped 20 ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE If Equipped 21 Remote Unlock The Doors 21 To Lock The Doors lesen 23 Using The Panic Alarm 24 Programming Additional Transmitters 25 Transmitter Battery Replacement 25 General Information 5 26 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 26 How To Use Remote Start 27 M Door Locks auses pir ina a Pia ee 30 Manual Door Locks 00 30 Power Door Locks If Equipped 31 Child Protection Door Lock 32 a Windows zs 9ee RR ta nea ENa dug 34 Power Windows If Equipped 34 Wind Buffeting E Oc
29. Appearance Care sades aits cee eee 651 ASHA csoedoes ad EP e EYED Dees EE 207 Assistance Towing less 118 Auto Down Power Windows 35 Automatic Dimming Mirror 98 Automatic Door Locks 020005 32 Automatic Headlights liess 163 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 360 a INDEX 709 Automatic Transmission lesen 380 Adding Fluid cere REI EE 650 Fluid and Filter Changes 651 Fluid Level Check 0 648 649 Fluid Iype ectiuswecide ste Bethe nsss 648 678 Gear Ranges 4 sues a eder Vrae ea As 381 SHINS i ee ed RR e Pee E 390 401 Special Additives 0 00004 649 Torque Converter 42 222 RA 390 Axle Fluid 222222224 reri Rx Hee a 646 678 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 646 B Pillar Location 1 0 0 eee eee 498 Back Up Camera lees 187 Bar Stabilizer Sway System 431 Battery 22693 9a 4 eae Sa eee wen Sob ates 630 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 25 Saving Feature Protection 167 Belts Seal 4 urb eur RES RA Pneu wae d 41 87 Body Builders Guide 0 000 6 Body Mechanism Lubrication 633 Brake Assist System 0 0 0 0000000 ee 482 Brake Control System Electronic 481 Brake Fluid uorum 644 678 Brake System o riesite see a 480 644 Anti Lock ABS 000 000 ee 481 Fluid
30. Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SE
31. Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Electronic Range Select ERS Operation The Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position For example if you shift the transmission into 3 third gear the transmission will never shift above third gear but will shift down into second and first gear normally You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between all available gears Tapping the shift lever to the left console shift or the ERS switch column shift will activate ERS mode display the cur rent gear in the instrument cluster and maintain that gear as the top available gear Once in ERS mode tapping the shift lever to the left or right console shift or the ERS or switch column shift will change the top available gear STARTING AND OPERATING 387 051205603 Column Sh
32. for up 20 seconds The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display CLEAR ING CHANNELS Release the buttons when the EVIC displays CHANNELS CLEARED ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 NOTE e Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons e If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manu factured after 1995 These garage door openers can be identified by the LEARN or TRAIN button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button you want to program and the hand held transmit ter button 4 Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHAN NEL T
33. in Starting and Operating for further information In order to accommodate the extra weight entailed under towing and hauling conditions and to increase driver comfort while launching on a hill the system recognizes when the TOW HAUL switch is activated and compen sates by releasing brake pressure at a slower rate while throttle is applied in order to prevent the vehicle from rolling down the hill ee STARTING AND OPERATING 485 WARNING Continued e HSA is not a parking brake If you stop the vehicle WARNING e If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid rolling down the incline while resuming accelera tion manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal Always remember the driver is re sponsible for braking the vehicle Continued on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK or using the parking brake it will roll down the incline and could collide with another vehicle object or person and cause serious or fatal injury Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle
34. issus 218 Storage And Seats Crew Cab 218 Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers Regular Cab Models 219 Bl Rear Window Features Rear Window Defroster Power Sliding Rear Window If Equipped Manual Sliding Rear Window If Equipped li Fold Flat Load Floor If Equipped ll Rambox If Equipped Rambox Integrated Box Side Storage Bins Rambox Safety Warning Bed Extender If Equipped Bed Rail Tie Down System ll Slide In Campers Camper Applications 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME li Storage 220 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 B Easy Off Tailgate saa mx Rear 238 Removing The Tailgate ci xn 239 Disconnecting The Rear Camera If Locking Tailgate crose nea Tarpa 000 240 EQuIpped ss sc aedes doped ese 238 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE xe MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control lever under the mirror to the night position lever flipped toward the rear of vehicle A Adjusting Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equ
35. loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over the front and rear axle Weigh ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate 544 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the
36. or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M system Only one linked or paired mobile phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death Uconnect Phone Button The radio or steering wheel controls if R equipped will contain the two control buttons Uconnect Phone button and Voice Com mand evr button that will enable you to access the system When you press the button you will hear the word Uconnect followed by a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command Voice Command Button Actual button location may vary with the ra t VR dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth mobile phone See the Uconnect website for supported phones Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the
37. pressing the GAIN adjustment button or sliding the manual brake control lever will display the GAIN setting for 10 seconds and the Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light will not be displayed If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the Integrated Trailer Brake Module ITBM the Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light will flash GAIN Adjustment Buttons Pressing these buttons will adjust the brake control power output to the trailer brakes in 0 5 increments The GAIN setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 or decreased to a minimum of 0 no trailer braking GAIN The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake control for the specific towing condition and should be changed as towing conditions change Changes to towing condi tions include trailer load vehicle load road conditions and weather Adjusting GAIN NOTE This should only be performed in a traffic free environment at speeds of approximately 20 25 mph 30 40 km h 560 STARTING AND OPERATING 1 Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condition functioning normally and properly adjusted See your trailer dealer if necessary 2 Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connec tions according to the trailer manufacturer s instructions 3 When a trailer with electric EOH brakes is plugged in the trailer connected message should appear in the EVIC if the connection is not recognized by the ITBM braking functions will
38. taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing L Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 686 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Ses 56 000 Miles 91 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 56 000 miles 91 000 km 1 Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 687 64 000 Miles 104 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 64 000 miles 104 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the ignition cables 3 7L Engine Replace the spark plugs 3 7L and 5 7L Engines Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet
39. will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type 16 Digit Character Display No program type
40. 0000 629 Pressure Gauge sees RR 254 Recommendation ss 628 674 Synthetic iesu ee ee aah Ex dE eie 629 MISCOSIU ird dee re RIA ee he as 628 674 Onboard Diagnostic System 623 624 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 191 Operating Precautions 0005 623 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 Outside Rearview Mirrors 99 Overdrive srar Ceea ee ee ae 389 399 409 Overdrive OFF Switch 389 399 409 Overhead Console 6 0 ccc eee 189 Overheating Engine 000 251 583 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 703 Panic Alafm 4 di 40 e RR ee seda 24 Park Sense System Rear 00005 177 Parking Brake sss kta o Ce Rs Passing ight 4452 55 ete emm ees Pedals Adjustable 720 INDEX ae Personal Settifigs uch ane ae kare hanes gen ewe 282 Pets Xuan gh ieee hag Rae arenes ay SoS near iis 85 Pets Transporting 244 60 eu 85 Phone Cellular scele 105 Phone Hands Free Uconnect 105 Pickup BOX 5e eee aly Wee Garay neas 224 Placard Tire and Loading Information 498 Power Door Locks is tua eae ae ela eee ne 31 Mirrors iuc e pex eee eS aS 101 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 203 208 Seals sskaaheuageseed EEPE DEPE EEEE 139 Sliding Rear Window 20 221 Steering soceri ee ee e eg Ee 476 477 SUunrOOF 3294 CRGO RUE M euh 200 Windows ee 9 fee
41. 1 On Road 2 Off Road The switch has two positions On Road and Off Road The system is normally in the On Road mode indicated by a solid green light The stabilizer sway bar should remain in the On Road mode during normal driving conditions 432 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on hard surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph 29 km h you may lose control of the vehicle which could result in serious injury The front stabilizer bar enhances vehicle stability and is necessary for main taining control of the vehicle The system monitors vehicle speed and will attempt to reconnect the stabilizer bar at speeds over 18 mph 29 km h This is indicated by a flashing off road light and solid on road light Once vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph 22 km h the system will attempt to return to the Off Road mode To disconnect the stabilizer sway bar shift to either 4HI or 4LO as shown in Four Wheel Drive Operation and press the top of the stabilizer sway bar button to obtain the Off Road position The amber indicator light will flash until the stabilizer sway bar has been fully discon nected NOTE The stabilizer sway bar may be torque locked due to left and right suspension height differences This condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle loading In order for the stabilizer sway bar to disconnect reconnect the right and left halves of t
42. 1 mm ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 677 Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Spark Plugs 4 7L Engine Upper Bank FR8TE2 Gap 0 039 in 99 mm Lower Bank FR8T1332 Gap 0 051 in 1 30 mm Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine LZFR5C 11 Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Fuel Selection 3 7L and 4 7L 87 Octane Engines Fuel Selection 5 7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended 678 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission Gasoline Engines Only MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Transfer Case MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Transfer Case BW44 44 Only MOPAR BW44 44 Transfer Case Fluid or equivalent Front Axle 1500 Four Wheel Drive Models GL 5 SAE 75W 90 MS 9763 or equivalent Rear Axle 1500 Models MOPAR Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W 140 MS 8985 Limited Slip Rear Axles require the addition of 5 oz 148 ml MOPAR Limited Slip Additive or equivalent Front and Rear Axle 2500 3500 Models Synthetic GL 5 SAE 75W 90 or equivalent Limited Slip 10 5 11 5 inch Rear Axles Limited slip additive is not required Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703 or equivalent If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptab
43. 12 Power Outlet Cigar Lighter 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss SWITCH BANK BUTTON DESCRIPTION Upper Switch Bank The upper switch bank is located on the center of the instrument panel m LL Tow ESC HAUL OFF LIGHT LOAD d O 1 TOW HAUL Refer to Starting And Operating for more information 2 ESC OFF Refer to Starting And Operating for more information 3 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER Refer to What To Do In Emergencies for more infor mation 4 115V POWER INVERTER Refer to Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for more information 5 REAR PARK ASSIST Refer to Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for more information 6 TPMS LIGHT LOAD IF EQUIPPED Refer to Starting And Operating for more information Lower Switch Bank The lower switch bank is located on the center of the instrument panel UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 1 HEATED SEATS Refer to Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for more information 2 VENTILATED SEATS Refer to Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for more information 3 HEATED STEERING WHEEL Refer to Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for more information 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BASE 040307647 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM ee 1 0 t
44. 2 Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head restraint through the outboard tether strap loop then route it to the tether strap loop located directly behind the center rear seat 3 Pass each tether strap hook under the head restraint and through the loop of webbing behind the child seat 4 Route each tether strap to the anchor behind the center seat and attach the hooks to the anchor loop 5 Place a child restraint on the center rear seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head restraint through the center seat tether strap loop and anchor to the tether strap loop located behind either outboard seating positions 6 Install each child restraint and remove the slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufactur er s instructions Multiple Child Restraint Quad Cab Crew Cab 1 Anchor Loops 2 Snap Hook 3 Tether Strap 4 Passenger s Side Rear Child Seat 5 Rear Center Child Seat 6 Driver s Side Rear Child Seat E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE
45. 24 km max distance Tow in forward direction Wheel Lift or Front NOT ALLOWED Dolly Tow Rear OK NOT ALLOWED Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 613 Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent If the vehicle s battery is discharged see Shift Lever damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other Override in What To Do In Emergencies for instruc equipment designed for the purpose following equip tions on shifting the automatic transmission out of the ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is PARK position for towing mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when towing When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc do not attach to front or rear suspension components while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN Damage to your vehicle may result from improper position not the ACC position towing 614 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME Towing Without The Ignition Key Fob Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK OFF position The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is
46. 3 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and front passenger temperature buttons Once the desired tem perature is displayed the system will achieve and auto matically maintain that comfort level 4 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible e The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features SETUP in this section of the manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low and the DELAY symbol will appear in the ATC display until the engine warms up The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode and DELAY will no longer be illuminated in the display The blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is selected or by adjusting the blower control knob and setting the fan to any fixed speed ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363 Manual Operation This system offers a full compleme
47. 335 vehicle is not equipped with a DVD player follow the radio s instructions to turn Video Lock on The radio and the video screen s indicate when Video Lock is active e Pressing the Video Lock again or turning the ignition OFF turns Video Lock OFF and allows remote control operation of the VES m Replacing The Batteries The remote control requires two AAA batteries for op eration To replace the batteries Locate the battery compartment on the back of the remote then slide the battery cover downward e Replace the batteries making sure to orient them according to the polarity diagram shown e Replace the battery compartment cover 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Headphones Operation The headphones receive two separate channels of audio using an infrared transmitter from the video screen Front seat occupants receive some headphone audio coverage to allow them to adjust the headphone volume for the young rear seat occupants that may not be able to do so for themselves If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control verify that the screen is turned on and in the down position and that the channel is not muted and the headphone channel selector switch is on the desired channel If audio is still not heard check that fully charged batteries are installed in the headphones 010107716 1 Volume Control 2 Power Button 3 Channel Selection Switch 4 Power Indicator es UNDERSTA
48. 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 611 Center Console Shifter If Equipped To access the override carefully remove using a flat bladed screwdriver the override access cover which is located on the right of the shift lever gate 1 Firmly set the parking brake 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position without starting the engine 3 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 4 Using a screwdriver or similar tool press and hold the ie N bos 051205828 override tab through the access port on the center con TEN sole Shift Lever Override Access Cover 5 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position 6 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 7 Reinstall the shift lever override access cover 612 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service If the transmission and drivetrain are operable disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under Recreational Towing in the Starting and Operating section Towing Wheels OFF Condition the Ground 2WD Models any Models See instructions in Recreational Towing If transmission is operable under Starting and Operating Flat Tow NONE e Transmission in NEUTRAL e Transmission in PARK e 30 mph 48 km h max speed e Transfer Case in NEUTRAL e 15 miles
49. 70 PSI TIRE SIZE LT265 7017E LT285 70R17E SEE OWNERS MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION _ 3 81c57c10 Example Supplemental Tire Pressure Label To switch from the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold to the light load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold begin by placing the ignition switch in the RUN position Next lower all four road tire pressures to the Light Load Inflation Pressure values as listed on the Supplemental ee STARTING AND OPERATING 529 Tire Pressure Information label The Supplemental Tire Pressure Information label is located on the rear face of the driver door opening Use an accurate tire gauge to check the tire pressures when lowering all four tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this updated pressure information After all four tire pressures have been lowered to the Light Load inflation pressures press the tire light load inflation switch If the tire light load inflation switch s amber colored LED turns ON the TPMS is using the light load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning thresholds If the tire light load inflation switch amber colored LED flashes on and off for 10 seconds after all four tire pressures have been lowered to the Light Load inflation pressures the pressure in any one of the four tires may not be at the light load inflation pressure cold values as indicated for the
50. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever clockwise without first pull ing it toward you column shift or rearward with the brake pedal released floor shift after you have placed it in PARK Make sure the transmis sion is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 393 WARNING Continued CAUTION e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure e Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK OFF you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is position to the ON RUN position and also press running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and remove the key fob Once the key fob is removed the shift lever is locked in the PARK the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever c
51. Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to when the vehicle is being jacked be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Continued ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 593 CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on WARNING Continued Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle for lifting this vehicle during a tire change 1 Remove the spare wheel jack and tools from storage If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground 3 Placement of the jack m ag GS Jack Warning Label 2 Using the wheel wrench loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 594 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE e 1500 Series Trucks When changing a
52. Cigar Lighter Bench Seat 1 Cigar Lighter 2 Ash Receiver 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED A 115 Volt 150 Watts Maximum outlet is located on the center stack of the instrument panel to the right of the radio This outlet can power cellular phones electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts Certain high end video games such as Playsta tion3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit as will most power tools The power inverter is designed with built in overload protection If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded the power inverter will automatically shut down Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts the power inverter may have to be reset manually To reset the inverter manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON To avoid overloading the circuit check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter 035005840 dm 035005813 Power Inverter Outlet The power inverter switch is located on the switch bank below the Climate Controls To turn on the power outlet press the switch once Press the switch a second time to turn the power outlet off ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 NOTE e When the power inverter switch is pressed there will be a delay of approximately
53. Cleaning Wheels amp us sex ree Sua RU Rd Ba 653 Climate Control 0 00 00 00 00 eee 355 Clock ssbessu Eae PEEEBRSUPPSTEG 290 299 Cold Weather Operation 0040 376 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 354 Compact Spare T elm RR 9 RR 506 Compass mcr LER eI ES RSS aq bte 280 Compass Calibration i e 281 Compass Variance llle eee 281 Computer Trip Travel 0 040 277 Connector UGE g sateace ai ata an a wera aire a aks ae 313 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 313 Conserving Fuel 422g eae OR Soe 276 277 en INDEX 711 Console Overhead 0 000000 00 eee 189 Contract Service 2 0 ee Y 701 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 640 Cooling System i a tanker Ege ese RO s 638 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 639 Coolant Capacity e er dre ats 674 Coolant Level sa Bietet 0 00000 eee 638 641 Disposal of Used Coolant 641 Drain Flush and Refill 638 INSPECHON is iride se pe onde baa osea 641 Points to Remember 643 Pressure Cap seek em n res 640 RadiatorCap cxsruoersme eter dew 640 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 639 674 676 Cupholders 14 cot eher Chess e es 209 Customer Assistance 0 00000 e ee eee 699 Data Recorder Event 00000000008 69 Daytime Running Lights 167 Dealer Service Defroster Rear Window Defroster Windshield Delay Interm
54. Control Cruise Control 174 Speedometer sa sentet seen tees EXTA 251 Stabilizer Sway Bar System 431 Starting iene ss xem edt eee eee na 26 375 Automatic Transmission 375 Cold Weather celles 376 Engine Fails to Start 00004 376 Remote af dace eee oe ee a eRe LS Ha es 26 Starting Procedures Gas Engines 375 Steering POWEL 394 ga eda eem ew eR ax 476 477 Wheel Heated llle 172 Wheel Tilt i ccm em be dan 171 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 353 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls i a edes ENERO eee ale 353 Storage Compartment Center Seat 214 Storage Vehicle oss ete 366 663 Storing Your Vehicle 000050 663 Sun Roof isse ie e eee raresa eee is 200 Supplemental Tire Pressure Information 511 Sway Control Trailer 0 04 491 Synthetic Engine Oil 1 2 0 0 0 00000 629 System Remote Starting 000 26 Tachometer 6 eee 250 Tailgate cu ahora goede a eed odio a end pes oS 238 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 360 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 250 584 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 76 80 Text M ssaginp as Ex ER wl BRA a Rr a 126 724 INDEX ME Tilt Steering Column cresas sisse ne 171 Dp Start sis asad E Eana a ke ar erc t ERR RR 376 Tire and Loading Information Placard 498 511 Tire Identif
55. DO IN EMERGENCIES 607 WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the positive post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting 608 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Ss FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE CAUTION
56. E Towing A Disabled Vehicle Towing Without The Ignition Key Fob 611 Two Wheel Drive Models Four Wheel Drive Vehicles 614 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the upper switch bank just below the radio A flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 583 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase the engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C m s
57. ESC is off OFF 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ses ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster Nae Fuel Economy Tire PSI Vehicle Info 00 m 041062750 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC NOTE e The compass on your vehicle is self calibrating elimi nating the need to manually calibrate the compass e The EVIC main menu will display Radio Off AM FM and SAT radio stations and AUX HDD sources at the top of the main menu above Fuel Economy This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following e Compass and Outside Temperature e Audio Information e Fuel Economy e Vehicle Information e Warning Messages ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 e Customer Programmable Features System Setup e Trip Information in Odometer line 040909599 EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons E Press and release the UP button to scroll upward through the main menus and sub menus Press and release the DOWN button to scroll downward through the main menus and sub menus SELECT Button Press and release the SELECT button for access po to main menus or sub menus Press and hold the SELECT button for two se
58. Enter Enter Number See Setup Read Send Phonebook Name Number on Phone Flowchart Messages Messages x Flowchart is redialed The 32 name language specific phonebook will be Number associated Number used The phones paired are available across all languages with entry is Dialed is dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030607515 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Phonebook Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Entries Listed one Enter Name 1st Confirmation at a time Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Entry Deleted Enter Location Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 Phonebook Cleared Enter Number New Entry Added UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Voice Tree Setup Confirmation Select Audio SMS Incoming Prompts Devices Message Announcement laggl Gonttematian di p s Premnts temporary ne Francais anon Say 4 diat override pin code phone pice Sele phane to be deleted Syston System Lists Prone Deleted Phones All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M
59. Equipped e The Automatic Temperature Control ATC allows both driver and front passenger seat occupants to select individual comfort settings UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361 e When occupants in the vehicle select an Auto mode operation Auto blower operation is set by using rotary knobs on the control unit and a comfort temperature setting by using the temperature up and down but tons e The system provides set and forget operation for op timum comfort and convenience e The system can be controlled manually if desired e SYNC feature links the temperature controls the pas 14 13 12 11 i senger side temperature becomes the same as the temperature selected by the driver Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 1 Blower Control 9 DEFROST The ATC system automatically maintains the interior 5 eft Temperature p 10 Right Temperatiire Down comfort level desired by the driver and all passengers 3 SYNC Indicator 11 A C 4 Left Temperature Indicator 12 A C Indicator 5 Right Temperature 13 SYNC Temperature Button Indicator 6 DELAY Indicator 14 Left Temperature Down 7 Right Temperature Up 15 RECIRCULATE 8 MODE 362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Automatic Operation 1 Position the MODE control knob to the Auto position on the Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 2 Position the BLOWER control knob in the Auto posi tion on the ATC Panel
60. Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS Care should be taken when attempting to climb steep hills or driving diagonally across a hill or slope If natural obstacles force you to travel diagonally up or down a hill choose a mild angle and keep as little side tilt as possible Keep the vehicle moving and make turns slowly and cautiously If you must back down a hill back straight down using REVERSE gear Never back down in NEUTRAL or diago nally across the hill When driving over sand mud and other soft terrain shift to low gear and drive steadily Apply the accelerator slowly to avoid spinning the wheels Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of driving ee STARTING AND OPERATING 455 After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required an
61. If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow sand or mud it can often be moved by a rocking motion Move the shift lever e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be rhythmically between DRIVE and REVERSE while ap tween DRIVE and REVERSE do not spin the plying slight pressure to the accelerator In general the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to maintain damage may result the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast the engine is most effective may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no transmission shifting occurring CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 609 WARNING WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener e Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or vehicle Chains may break causing serious injury even failure of the axle and tires A tire could or death e Stand clear of vehicles when pul
62. Light Load condition as defined on the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information label located on the rear face of the driver door Using an accurate tire pressure gauge re check the tire pressures for the light load inflation pressure cold value WARNING It is the driver s responsibility to change to the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold condition when not driving in the light load condition as defined as two occupants 150 Ibs 68 kg each plus 200 Ibs 91 kg of cargo The vehicle Light Load Definition is found in the Supplemen tal Tire Pressure Information label located on the rear face of the driver door Failure to do so may cause you to lose control resulting in a collision causing seri ous or fatal injury 530 STARTING AND OPERATING Se To switch back to the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold press the tire light load inflation switch It is not necessary to first fill the tires to the max load inflation pressure cold values to switch the TPMS system to the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold If after pressing the tire light load inflation switch and tire pressures are below the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning thresholds the TPMS low pressure warning telltale light located in the instrument cluster will turn ON and a chime will sound The tire pressures are now required to be inflated to
63. MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Two Wheel Drive Four Wheel Drive Models Ground Models See Instructions Flat Tow NONE NOT ALiowen Tanomissoni PARK e Transfer case in NEUTRAL N e Tow in forward direction Dolly T Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED i din Rear OK NOT ALLOWED On Trailer ALL OK OK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 571 Recreational Towing Two Wheel Drive Models DO NOT flat tow this vehicle Damage to the drivetrain will result Recreational towing for two wheel drive models is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer If using a tow dolly follow this procedure 1 Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer s instructions 2 Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly 3 Firmly set the parking brake Place the transmission in PARK 4 Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly following the dolly manufacturer s instructions 5 Remove the key fob from the ignition switch 6 Install a suitable clamping device designed for tow ing to secure the front wheels in the straight position CAUTION e Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause severe transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Do not disconnect the driveshaft because fluid ma
64. Marker Lamp 194 Side Marker Lamps Dual Rear Wheels 194 Backup Lamp 0 0 0000 c eee eee 921 Rear License Plate Lamp 194 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 665 BULB REPLACEMENT Dual Or Quad Headlamp Front Park And Turn Signal If Equipped 1 Open the hood 2 Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable 3 Remove the four plastic push in fasteners that secure the upper radiator seal to the grille support and both fender ledges 4 Remove the two plastic push in rivets that secure the upper radiator seal to the radiator 5 Remove the upper radiator seal from the vehicle 6 Remove the two headlamp assembly attachment screws 7 Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front wheel remove the fastener and lift the cover over the access hole in the front of the wheel house splash shield Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained through this access hole 666 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 8 Reach through the access hole of the wheel house 10 Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the splash shield and lift the slide lock upward far enough to bulb socket disengage it from the lock post on the back of the front lamp unit housing 11 Replace bulb s as necessary CAUTION e Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces Shortened bulb life will result Always use the corre
65. Memory Positions And Linking RKE Transmitter To Memory Memory Position Recall To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked To Memory Easy Entry Exit Seat ll To Open And Close The Hood 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME 147 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 MLNS esae REX RR eae ees 162 Headlighits neg coin ae cade HESS 163 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 163 Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only 164 Headlight Delay 0 164 Parking Lights And Panel Lights 164 Fog Lights If Equipped 164 Interior Lights see Rm 165 Cargo Light scs aues poe y noe eie ae ie 166 Lights On Reminder 167 Battery DaVeP boca m Recipe ac Race ed 167 Daytime Running Lights DRL If Equipped isa esed e d CREER 167 Multifunction Lever lt sos seserseressss 167 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 169 Windshield Wipers serere reies imri snis 169 Windshield Wiper Operation Intermittent Wiper System Windshield Washers 000 170 Mist Feature sid e beoe eria ates 171 B Tilt Steering Column 22 171 lll Heated Steering Wheel If Equipped 172 ll Driver Adjustable Pedals If Equipped 173 Bi Electronic Speed Control
66. ON the TPMS is using the light load inflation pressure cold low inflation warning thresholds ee STARTING AND OPERATING 527 Tire Light Load Inflation Switch Operation If Equipped e This vehicle may have different recommended tire pressure values between the front and rear tires as shown in both the Tire Loading Information Label and the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information Label It is also equipped to be driven with tire pressures appro priate to either a Light Load condition or the vehicle Max Load condition 055807401 Tire Light Load Inflation Switch 528 STARTING AND OPERATING e The tire light load inflation switch will allow the driver to change between the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold and the light load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold depending on the vehicle s load condition Refer to the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information label for the vehicle s Light Load inflation pressures and Tire and Loading Information label for the vehicle s Max Load inflation pressures SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION FOR LIGHT LOAD AND MAX LOAD CONDITIONS LIGHT LOAD DEFINITION 2 OCCUPANTS 150 LEE EACH PLUS EOD LES CARGO MAX LOAD DEFINITION AS DEFINEO ON DRIVERS SIDE B PILLAR PLACARD FRONT REAR LIGHT LOAD INFLATION PRESSURE COLD 345 kPa 50 PSI PBO kPa 40 PSI MAX LOAD INFLATION PRESSURE COLD 410 kPa 60 PSI 495 kPa
67. One common condition is when loading a heavy pallet and dragging that pallet across the floor of the bed If a nail or sharp point is exposed under the weight of the pallet a scratch or tear is possible While not covered by your new vehicle warranty a cosmetic fix to cover the metal exposed by the scratch is required To repair a tear or gouge follow the directions provided in the MOPAR Quick Repair Kit FUSES 072905993 Totally Integrated Power Module Totally Integrated Power Module The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the Cavity Cartridge Mini Description engine compartment near the battery This center con Fuse Fuse tains cartridge fuses and mini fuses A description of each Jol 40 Amp Trailer Tow fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover Green otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on J02 30 Amp Electric Brake the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart Pink ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 659 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse J03 30 Amp Diesel Powertrain Jil 30 Amp Transfer Case Pink Control Module If Pink Module Equipped J12 30 Amp Rear Defroster J04 25 Amp Driver Door Node Pink Natural J13 60 Amp Main Ignition Off J05 25 Amp Passenger Door Yellow Draw IOD Fuse Natural Node J14 20 Amp Trailer Tow J06 40 Amp Antilo
68. PARK Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK OFF position Wait approximately 10 seconds a A C N e Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation 408 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Electronic Range Select ERS Operation The Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position For example if you shift the transmission into 3 third gear the transmission will never shift above third gear but will shift down into second and first gear normally You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between all available gears Tapping the ERS switch will activate ERS mode display the current gear in the instrument cluster and maintain that gear as the top available gear Once in ERS mode tapping ERS or will change the top available gear Column Shift Lever ee STARTING AND OPERATING 409 To exit ERS mo
69. Printed in U S A
70. Radio Controls 1 Press the MENU hard key on the radio faceplate 2 Touch the Rear VES soft key to display the Rear VES Controls If a channel list is displayed press the HIDE LIST soft key to display the Rear VES Controls screen DVD Video Menu ep Display Setting FER My Files DVD Setup Fm Screen Saver Sirius Traffic On Screen Disp E ew View System Setup Play Pause lu Picture M Audio Control Ls View 010107721 Rear VES Soft key 3 Touch the 1 or 2 based on the headphone channel you want to change To exit press the back arrow soft key at the top of the screen E Rear VES Controls AUX AUX2 12 00 LOCK LIST 010107710 Select Channel Screen 1 And AUX 1 In The VES Column es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A Video Is Playing On Channel 1 Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 2 Using The Remote Control 1 Press the MODE button on the Remote Control and the Mode Select Screen will display unless a video is playing then only a small banner will appear on the bottom of the screen 2 While looking at the video screen either press Up Down Left Right on the Remote Control to highlight the desired audio source or repeatedly press the MODE button on the remote until the desired audio source appears on the screen EE SAT Site 2 Batam ier Preset 10 AM DISC FM AUX SAT ves DISC HDD Ves AUX
71. Remover or equivalent to remove Special Care e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film stains near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once and to protect your paint finish Take care never to a month scratch the paint ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 653 e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer open has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint Wheel And Wheel Trim Care touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner e All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly e If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a non abrasive non acidic cleaner e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such ma
72. Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS
73. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 WARNING How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or i confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon e oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car e Doors closed bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious s Hood dosed injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters e HAZARD switch off away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls e BRAKE switch inactive brake pedal not pressed T could cause serious injury or death e Ignition key removed from ignition switch Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped e RKE PANIC button not pressed The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema turely e Battery at an acceptable charge level e Fuel meets minimum requirement e System not disabled from previous remote start event E e Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar Vehicle theft alarm not active 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low Remote Start Aborted System Fault Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle to Reset The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turne
74. Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect Phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or an other prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Pair a Device the following compound command can be said Pair a Bluetooth Device e For each feature explanation in this section only the compound form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the compound form voice command Phonebook New Entry or you can break the compound form command into two voice com mands Phonebook and New Entry Please re member the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to
75. Uconnect phone system but just one can be selected device while driving Failure to follow this warning and played could result in an accident Selecting Different Audio Device 1 Press PHONE button to begin 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup then Select Audio Devices 3 Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect phone system to list audio devices Next Track Use the SEEK UP button or press the VR button on the radio and say Next Track to jump to the next track music on your cellular phone Previous Track Use the SEEK DOWN button or press the VR button on the radio and say Previous Track to jump to the previous track music on your cellular phone Browse Browsing is not available on a BTSA device Only the current song that is playing will display info UCONNECT MULTIMEDIA VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM VES IF EQUIPPED Getting Started e Screen located in the overhead console Unfold the overhead LCD screen by pushing the button on the overhead console behind the screen Overhead Video Screen ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 e With the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position turn the radio on by pushing the ON OFF Volume Control knob e When the Video Screen are open and a DVD is inserted into the radio the screen turns on automatically the headphone transmitters turn on and playba
76. YOUR VEHICLE M ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever position the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph 18 km h or above The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 mph 16 km h ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Pro grammable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information The ParkSense Warning Display is located in the Instru ment cluster s EVIC display It provides both visual and audible warnings to indicate the distan
77. a O O O O L M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 693 i A 128 000 Miles 208 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service 136 000 Miles 221 000 km or Schedule 102 Months Maintenance T 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule E I Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before Change the engine oil and engine oil N 128 000 miles 208 000 km filter A J Replace the engine air cleaner filter T Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of y J Replace the ignition cables 3 7L Engine irregular wear even if it occurs before E 11 Replace the spark plugs 3 7L and 5 7L Engines 136 000 miles 221 000 km 1 Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only T Lube the front drive shaft fitting S 11 Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes 2500 3500 4x4 models only C Change the transfer case fluid H 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary E J Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for D damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary U L E S Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date 8 Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Co
78. allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle When the spare is clear tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the center of the wheel NOTE Always stow the spare tire with the valve stem facing the ground 060609053 Removing The Spare Tire 1 Wheel Wrench 2 Spare Tire It is recommended that you stow the flat or spare to avoid tangling the loose cable WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 591 NOTE The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack extension tube only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch Preparations 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice or slippery areas WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher 3 Set the parking brake 592 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Sg 4 Place the shift lever into PARK On four wheel drive Instructions vehicles shift the transfer case to the 4L position WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle 5 Turn the ignition OFF 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position For example if the right front wheel is being changed block the left rear wheel e
79. and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h or completely stopped Use either of the following procedures Preferred Procedure 1 With the engine running slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 While still rolling rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is ON not flashing shift the transmission back into gear 428 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Alternate Procedure 1 Bring the vehicle to complete stop 2 With the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine either OFF or running shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is ON not flashing shift the transmission back into gear NOTE e If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift or if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt is in process the desired position indicator light will flash continuously while the original posi tion indicator light is ON until all requirements have been met e The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON position then th
80. and make sure it is fully seated in the PARK gate ee STARTING AND OPERATING 405 e Look at the shift lever position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position e With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle rearward Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recre ational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information 406 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first second and third gears direct fourt
81. and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When operating in TOW HAUL mode transmission upshifts are delayed and the trans mission will automatically downshift for engine brak ing during steady braking maneuvers 051210733 TOW HAUL Switch The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW HAUL mode has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation If the TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations the clutch automatically disengages NOTE e The torque converter clutch will not engage and the transmission will not shift to sixth gear until the E STARTING AND OPERATING 411 transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm usu ally after 1 to 3 miles 1 6 to 4 8 km of driving Because sixth gear is disabled and engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not en gaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when cold This is normal Using the El
82. and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed 566 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss CAUTION Using this vehicle for snowplow applications can cause damage to the vehicle Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily SNOWPLOW 1500 Models Only NOTE Do not use this model vehicle for snowplow WARNING applications WARNING Snowplows and other aftermarket equipment should not be added to the front end of your vehicle The Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely affect performance of the airbag system in a collision Do not expect that the airbag will perform as de scribed earlier in this manual 2500 3500 Models Only Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory installed option These packages include components airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the front end structure The airbags could deploy unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a colli sion resulting in serious injury or death necessary to equip your vehicle with a snowplow NOTE Before installation of a snowplow it is highly recommended that the owner installer obtain and follow the recommendations contained within the current Body ee STARTING AND OPERATING 567 Builders Guide See your authorized dealer installer or snowplow manuf
83. audio format so MP3 files must always end with the extension mp3 or MP3 and WMA files must always end with the extension wma or WMA To prevent incorrect playback do not use these extensions for any other types of files For MP3 files only version 1 ID3 tag data such as artist name track title album etc are supported Any file that is copy protected such as those down loaded from many online music stores will not play The DVD player will automatically skip the file and begin playing the next available file es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347 e Other compression formats such as AAC MP3 Pro Disc Errors Ogg Vorbis and ATRAC3 will not play The DVD player will automatically skip the file and begin play ing the next available file If the DVD player is unable to read the disc a Disc Error message is displayed on the VES and Radio displays and the disc is automatically ejected A dirty damaged or e If you are creating your own files the recommended incompatible disc format are all potential causes for a fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps Disc Error message and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is between 64 and 192Kbps Variable bit rates are also supported For both formats the recommended sample rate is either 44 1kHz or 48kHz If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or visible errors that persists for 2 0 seconds the DVD player will attempt to c
84. be manu 1 ally folded both forward and rearward to prevent dam Sus USE age It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the full rearward position to resist damage when entering a car wash or a narrow location UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Power Mirrors If Equipped The controls for the power mirrors are located on the driver s door trim panel Power Mirror Controls 1 Mirror Select Buttons 2 Four Way Mirror Control Switch Power Mirror Controls To adjust a mirror press either the L left or R right The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but button to select the mirror that you want to adjust tons and a four way mirror control switch NOTE A light in the select button will illuminate indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Using the mirror control switch press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move 030405625 Power Mirror Movement Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information Driver s Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped The driver s outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlle
85. be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Recent Calls If your phone supports Automatic Phonebook Down load Uconnect Phone can list your Outgoing Incom ing and Missed Calls SMS Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your phone Read Messages If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to Uconnect Phone an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message If you wish to hear the new message e Press the amp button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Read or Read Messages e Uconnect Phone will play the new text message for you After reading a message you can Reply or Forward the message using Uconnect Phone ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Send Messages 3 Where are you You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send a new message 4 I need more direction e Press the amp button S TOT Hu 6 Why e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say mm SMS Send or Send Message 7 I love you e You can either say the message you wish to send or say 8 Call me List Messages There are 20 preset messages 9 Call me later To send a message press the vr button while the 10 Thanks system is listing the message and say Send Uconnect Phone
86. buckle turn the latch plate around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occu pants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Each vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle seat belt instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH child restraint anchorage systems are installed in the Quad Cab Mega Cab and Crew Cab rear seat outboard positions LATCH equipped seating positions feature both lower anchor bars located at the back of the seat cushion and tether strap anchorages located behind the seat back refer to Child Restraint Tether Anchor 022632837 Quad Cab Mega Cab Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats Driver Side en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Child restraint systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorage
87. can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat switch the front of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Power Lumbar If Equipped Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may be also be equipped with power lumbar The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support 030905750 Lumbar Control Switch Heated Seats If Equipped On some models
88. cleaner filter Replace the ignition cables 4 7L Engine Replace the top row and side row of spark plugs 4 7L Engine Replace the spark plugs 3 7L and 5 7L Engines Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the transfer case fluid Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system LocoOcOODDDCCDOOCDUD Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 L Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 691 104 000 Miles 169 000 km or 112 000 Miles 182 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service 78 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule T Change the engine oil and engine oil filter T Change the engine oil and engine oil J Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 112 000 miles 182 000 km T Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of m If using your vehicle for any of the following D
89. collision Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag An air bag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi tion Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se If a child from 1 to 12 years old not ina rear facing child 5 If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat modified to accommodate a disabled person contact as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided Refer to Child Restraints under If You Need Assistance You should read the instructions provided with your WARNING child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more 2
90. dam age the sensors ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operat ing properly Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense When you turn ParkSense off the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF Further more once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key e When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE ParkSense when on will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper een UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 e Objects such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc must not be placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear COULON fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do e ParkSense is only a parking aid an
91. dis abled as follows For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings System Setup in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Use the Auto Unlock Doors feature in accor dance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock To provide a safer environment for children riding in the rear seat the rear doors if equipped of your vehicle have the Child Protection Door Lock system THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 _ ae vy 022605851 Child Protection Door Lock Location Child Lock Control To use the system open each rear door use a flat blade screwdriver or emergency key and rotate the dial to engage and disengage the Child Protection locks When Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision the system on a door is engaged that door can only be Remember that the rear doors can only be opened opened by using the outside door handle even if the from the outside when the Child Protection locks are inside door lock is in the unlocked position engaged 022605852 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE WINDOWS After setting the Child Protection Door Lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position Power Windows If Equipped For emergency exit with the system engaged move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position roll d
92. down Range with the transmission in first gear manually select first gear on automatic transmissions and pro ceed with caution Allow engine braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do not allow the tires to lock WARNING e If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway If you stall Do not descend steep orade in NEUTRAL Use or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill PB allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brake Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine and transmission to Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose control and be seriously injured 442 STARTING AND OPERATING ME help regulate your speed If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires WARNING If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle which may result in severe injury Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE Never back down a hill in NEU TRAL using only the vehicle brakes Never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down
93. eee ea TREES 34 Power Steering Fluid 0 05 678 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 55 Pretensioners Seat Belts fis ates ehe e ate e Ronse 53 Programmable Electronic Features 282 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 04 21 Radial Ply Tires s 52i Rs 505 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 638 640 Radio Operation coedsgdssia satio u t D ae 355 Ramp Travel Index suoi senipa riena pemanah 433 Rear Axle Differential 00 646 Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails 236 Rear Park Sense System 000005 177 Rear Seat Folding 0000 150 151 Rear Window Features 00040 220 Rear Window Sliding 00005 221 Reclining Front Seats 0 0 0 0 0 000 ee 148 Reclining Rear Seats 6 0 00000 eee 150 Recorder Event Data 0000000008 69 en INDEX 721 Recreational Towing 0000000 570 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 573 575 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N lessen 574 578 Reformulated Gasoline isses 532 Refrigerant 2 edes t oera e dere e 633 Reminder Seat Belt 0 000020 ee 54 Remote Control Starting System ccs en oe ce me es 26 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 0 21 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 353 Remote Starting System 00 0 26 Replacement Keys ae
94. flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key fob is released If this occurs continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key fob once the engine is running smoothly If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor the Normal Starting procedure should be repeated After Starting The idle speed is automatically controlled and will de crease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord 1500 Models The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the passenger side of the vehicle near the right head lamp assembly It is located between the front grill and the radiator but underneath the black upper seal 2500 3500 Models The engine block heater cord is routed through the grille by the right front tow hook 378 STARTING AND OPERATING M It includes a removable cap that is secured by a tethered AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION strap It also has a c clip that is used for storage when not CAUTION in use for the winter months During winter months remove the heater cord wiring assembly from itself on m 8 y Damage to the tr
95. for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the TPM sensor and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light 520 STARTING AND OPERATING e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with whe
96. has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can press the Ave button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the EvR button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored Uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the VR button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones ov
97. have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a win dow If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags they are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB to provide enhanced protection for an occupant during a side impact If the vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags they are located in the outboard side of the front seats NOTE e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e After any accident the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Air Ba
98. humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the RECIRCULATION control button Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily The recirculation LED will illuminate on the blower control knob when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the Floor Defrost Mix and Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor mance make sure the engine cooling system is function ing properly and the proper amount type and concen tration of coolant is used Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it ma
99. improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occu pants including those in child restraints 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seat belts The feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph 8 km h by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the sequence starts it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened The driver should instruct all ot
100. instru ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system The diagnos tics also record the nature of the malfunction 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags Different air bag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger
101. is removed e Unlock the doors automatically In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event the ignition switch must be changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 WARNING e As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for air bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritati
102. is at a point just below trailer wheel lockup If towing a heavier trailer trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting of 10 EVIC Display Messages The trailer brake control interacts with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display messages along with a single chime will be displayed when a malfunction is determined in the trailer connection trailer brake control or on the trailer Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information CAUTION Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of trailer braking There may be a increase in stop ping distance or trailer instability which could result in damage to your vehicle trailer or other property WARNING Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of trailer braking There may be a increase in stop ping distance or trailer instability which could result in personal injury NOTE e An aftermarket controller may be available for use with air trailer brake systems and other systems not STARTING AND OPERATING 563 compatible with ITBM To determine the type of The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle brakes on your trailer and the availability of control but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector lers check with y
103. is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring TPM Telltale Light illu minates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this informa tion For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 158 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the TPM Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value ee STARTING AND OPERATING 519 CAUTION NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established
104. is milky or foamy in appearance e Always check the depth of the standing water ue l after driving through standing water Do not con before driving through it Never drive through tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further dam age Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Continued 454 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING e Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded
105. look and function as the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip ment tire and wheel as a spare a non matching tempo rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your vehicle Temporary use spares are engineered to be used only with your vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following types of non matching tempo rary use spares compact full size or limited use Do not install more than one non matching temporary use spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T S Temporary Spare Tire ee STAR
106. loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary To attach a child restraint tether strap e Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat preferably between the head restraint posts under neath the head restraint Child Restraint Tether Anchor Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for con nection to tether anchors have been available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will provide add on tether strap kits for their older products ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Regular Cab models have two tether anchorages one Tether Anchorage Points At The Right And Center each behind the front center and right seats Quad Cab Front Seat Regular Cab All Seats Mega Cab and Crew Cab models have three anchor ages one behind each of the rear seats 1 Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the E tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back under WARNING E restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to seat failure and injury to the child In a collision the seat could come loose and allow the child to crash into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers or 2 Lift the cover if so equipped and attach the hook to the square opening in the sheet metal even be thrown from the vehicle Use only the anchor posit
107. may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should
108. may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ses 3 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry x2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE e The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start e Obstructions between the vehicle and the RKE trans mitter may reduce this range en
109. millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent 76 Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 495 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol Asymbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load LL Light load tire C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 496 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of
110. multifunction lever forward to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward yourself normal position to return to low beam 21 Voltmeter When the engine is running the gauge indicates the electrical system voltage The pointer should stay within the normal range if the battery is charged If the pointer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 moves to either extreme left or right and remains there during normal driving the electrical system should be serviced NOTE The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at various engine temperatures This cycling operation is caused by the post heat cycle of the intake manifold heater system The number of cycles and the length of the cycling operation is controlled by the engine control module Post heat operation can run for several minutes and then the electrical system and voltmeter needle will stabilize 22 Cargo Light The cargo light will illuminate when the cargo light is activated by pressing the cargo light S button on the headlight switch 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss 23 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the Anti lock Brake System reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengage
111. not www HomeLink com for safety information or as expressly approved by the party responsible for com sistance pliance could void the user s authority to operate the 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan device gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage 4 The term IC before the certification registration num while programming the transceiver Exhaust gas ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical can cause serious injury or death specifications were met 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED WARNING The power sunroof switch is located on the overhead console between the courtesy reading lights e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle In a collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or Power Sunroof Sw
112. of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no more than a Ya turn quickly back and forth This will provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide enough traction to complete the climb If you do not make it to the top place the vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the grade using engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes WARNING Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around on a steep grade Driving across an incline increases the risk of a roll over which may result in severe injury ee STARTING AND OPERATING 441 e Driving Down Hill Before driving down a steep hill e Driving Across An Incline If at all possible avoid you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe driving across an incline If it is necessary know your descent What is the surface traction Is the grade too vehicle s abilities Driving across an incline places steep to maintain a slow controlled descent Are there more weight on the down hill wheels which increases obstacles Is it a straight descent Is there plenty of the possibilities of a down hill slide or rollover Make distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable vehicle descends too fast If you feel confident in your soils If possible transverse the incline at an angle ability to proceed then make sure you are in 4L Low heading slightly up or
113. on the radio and set the radio station presets up to 12 AM and 12 FM stations can be set 6 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the key 7 Press and release the S SET button located on the driver s door 8 Within five seconds press and release MEMORY button 1 or 2 on the driver s door The next step must be performed within five seconds if you desire to also use a RKE transmitter to recall memory positions 9 Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE transmitters 10 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position 11 Select Remote Linked to Memory in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and enter Yes Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 12 Repeat the above steps to set the next memory position using the other numbered memory button or to link another RKE transmitter to memory Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC To recall the memory settings for driver one press MEMORY button number 1 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 To rec
114. one second before the power inverter status indicator turns on The status indicator of the AC power inverter indicates whether the inverter is producing AC power e Due to built in overload protection the power inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded WARNING To avoid serious injury or death e Do not use a three prong adapter Do not insert any objects into the receptacles e e Do not touch with wet hands e Close the lid when not in use If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CUPHOLDERS Front Instrument Panel Cupholders 40 20 40 Seats The cupholders are located in the pull out tray at the bottom of the center stack The pull out tray must be secured when opened To secure the tray push down until it clicks 035105612 Front Cupholders 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Front Instrument Panel Cupholders Floor Rear Cupholder Quad Cab Mounted Shifter Quad Cab vehicles may be equipped with a rear cup For vehicles equipped with bucket seats and a floor holder that consists of two cup wells for rear passenger mounted shifter there are two cupholders located in the convenience floor console N Cupholders Floor Mounted Shifter Rear Cup Wells UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 Rear Cupholder Crew Cab STORAGE Crew Cab vehicles are equipped with rear cupholders Glove Box Storage located in th
115. or Gross Axle Weight GAWR ratings These weights are specified on the Safety Com pliance Certification Label on the driver s side door opening NOTE Detach the snowplow when transporting pas sengers Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to specifica tions at the factory without consideration for the weight of the plow Front end toe in should be checked and reset if necessary at the beginning and end of the snowplow season This will help prevent uneven tire wear The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle is parked Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow equip ment following the recommendations provided by the specific snowplow manufacturer Over The Road Operation With Snowplow Attached The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and causes the engine to operate at higher than normal temperatures Therefore when transporting the plow angle the blade completely and position it as low as road or surface conditions permit Do not exceed 40 mph 64 km h The operator should always maintain a safe stopping distance and allow adequate passing clearance ee STARTING AND OPERATING 569 Operating Tips Under ideal snow plowing conditions 20 mph 32 km h should be maximum operating speed The operator should be familiar with the area and surface to be cleaned Reduce speed and use extreme caution when plowing unfamiliar areas or under poor visibility NOTE During snowplow usage on vehicles equipped
116. or None undefined Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Foreign Language Language 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Program Type 16 Digit Character Display Program Type 16 Digit Character Display Information Inform Top 40 Top 40 Jazz Jazz Weather Weather News News By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon Nostalgia Nostalga is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Oldies Oldies station with the same selected Music Type name The Personality Persnlty Music Type function only operates when in the FM Public Public mode Rhythm and Blues R amp B If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Religious Music Rel Musc Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be Religious Talk Rel Talk exited and the radio will tune to the preset station noe Bac SETUP Button Soft Soft Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between Soft Rock Soft Rck the following items SOH EByttuancPIHes Son REE Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow Sports Sports you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the Talk Talk TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control kno
117. or chains observe the following precautions Continued CAUTION Continued Because of limited chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Bro ken chains can cause serious vehicle damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could suggest chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Install chains as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 0 5 mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 45 mph 72 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Do not install tire chains on front wheels of 4x2 vehicles Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave ment Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 513 CAUTION Continued e Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower sug gested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different than the speed recommended by the manufacturer These cautions apply to all chain traction devices includ ing link and cable radial chains NOTE On 4x2 and 4x4 1500 model trucks the use of class S snow chains is permitted on the rear wheels only of trucks equipped with P265 70R17 tires On 4x2 2500 model trucks the use of class U snow chains is permitted on the rear wheels only of truc
118. press and release the BACK button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the engine the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat these steps 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode Distance To Empty DTE If Equipped Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read 0 or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will con tinue from the last fuel average reading before the reset Fuel Saver Mode ECO will display in the Compass Outside Temperature line of the EVIC This message will appear whenever the Multi Displacement System MDS if equipped allows the engine to operate on four cylinders or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner N 9 2t Fuel Economy AVG 99 9 OTE LOW FUEL MPG 10 0 Ori Fuel Saver Mode On 041009379 This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in ord
119. rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fric tion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling If equipped the electronic Trailer Sway Control TSC recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies individual wheel brakes and or reduces engine power to attempt to eli
120. result in serious injury or death E WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous CAUTION Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of Do not place any article under a power seat or control which could cause a collision and serious impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Passenger s Power Seat If Equipped Continued Some models are equipped with a six way power pas senger seat The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of the seat The switch is used to control the movement of the seat and seat cushion the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion
121. road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 706 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separa
122. seat belt buckle located on the inboard side of the passenger seat Insert the seat belt tongue into the center red slot on the black buckle The black buckle latch plate can be removed when the seat belt tongue is pressed into the buckle Allow the retractor to take up the extra webbing and the buckles will hang vertically from the cab back exit bezel thus freeing up all the area behind the front seats Detaching Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 2 To reattach the seat belt to the front center seat pull the black buckle latch plate forward from the cab back panel and insert it into the black keyed buckle until there is an audible click For proper seat belt usage refer Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING e If the black latch and black buckle are not prop erly connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant the seat belt will not be able to provide proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a collision When reattaching the black latch and black buckle ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted If the webbing is twisted follow the preceding procedure to detach the black latch and black buckle untwist the webbing and reattach the black latch and black buckle Inserting Latch Plate In Use Position 022632836 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 Lap Shoul
123. selected position indicator light will con tinue to flash 3 The transfer case will not shift NOTE Before retrying a selection make certain that all the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case position have been met To retry the selection turn the control knob back to the current position wait five seconds and retry selection To find the shift require ments refer to the Shifting Procedure for your transfer case located in this section The SVC 4WD Warning Light monitors the electronic shift four wheel drive system If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving it means that the four wheel drive system is not function ing properly and that service is required WARNING Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the SVC 4WD Warning Light is illuminated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning as this can cause damage to driveline components 418 STARTING AND OPERATING Se When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumferen
124. shift lever to the desired positions The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components The Transfer Case Position Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will alert the driver that the vehicle is in four wheel drive and that the front and rear drive shafts are locked together This light will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into either the 4H or 4L position There is no light for the 2H or NEUTRAL positions When operating your vehicle in 4L the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference will adversely affect shifting and can cause damage to the drivetrain NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning The transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take place Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not g
125. single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle is needed push the washer knob located on the end of the multifunction lever inward to the first detent and release The wipers will cycle one time and automatically shut off NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid TILT STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward The tilt lever is located on the steering column below the multifunction lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the steering column With one hand firmly on the steering wheel move the steering column up or down as desired Release the lever to lock the steering column firmly in place 031605589 Tilt Steering Lever 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold
126. someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The Uconnect Phone will play some of the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the Uconnect Phone simply press the amp button and follow the audible prompts for directions Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the Sw button on the radio control head 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pairing instructions e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Device Pairing e When prompted after the beep say Pair a Device and follow the audible prompts e You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PI
127. start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Continued WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 585 WARNING Continued e The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location The jack and jack tools are stored under the front passenger seat 060505826 Removal To access the jack and jack tools you must remove the plastic access cover located on the side of the seat To remove the cover pull the front part of the cover closest to the front of the seat toward you to release a locking tab Once the front of the cover is loose slide the cover toward the front of the seat until it is free from the seat frame Jack Access Cover 586 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Remove the jack and tools by removing the wing bolt and sliding the assembly from under the seat Jack And Tools 2500 3500 Series Jack And Tools 1500 Series ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 587 WARNING After using the jack and tools always reinstall them in the original carrier and location While driving you may experience abrupt stopping rapid accelera tion or sharp turns A loose jack tools bracket or other objects in the vehicle may move around
128. storage bins are located on both sides of the pickup and cargo management system consisting of three fea box The cargo storage bins provide watertight lockable tures illuminated storage for up to 150 Ibs 68 kg of evenly distributed cargo e Integrated box side storage bins e Cargo extender divider e Bed rail tie down system RamBox Cargo Storage Bins ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 CAUTION Failure to follow the following items could cause damage to the vehicle e Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins is properly secured e Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 150 Ib 68 kg per bin To open a storage bin press and release the button located on the lid The RamBox lid will open upward to allow hand access Lift the lid to fully open RamBox Pushbutton And Lock 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The interior of the RamBox will automatically illumi nate when the lid is opened In addition to the automatic illumination switch there is a manual on off switch located at the rear of each storage bin Pushing the switch once will turn off the bin lights pushing the switch again will turn the lights back on RamBox Light Switch CAUTION Leaving the lid open for extended periods of time could cause the vehicle battery to discharge If the lid is required to stay open for extended periods of time it is recommended that the bin lights be turned o
129. strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the Navigation Multimedia radio display screen along with a caution note to check entire sur roundings across the top of the screen After five sec onds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located to the left of the tailgate handle When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again When displayed static grid lines will illustrate the width of the vehicle while a dashed center line will indicate the center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch receiver The stat
130. ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features System Setup in Under standing Your Instrument Panel further information for e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but no longer than ten seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm System Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Sound Horn W
131. the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch Removing Key Fob From Ignition at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and Place the shift lever in PARK if equipped with an automatic transmission Turn the Key Fob to the OFF position and then remove the Key Fob NOTE then pull the key out with your other hand 020207436 Emergency Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinder with either side up For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 min utes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 WARNING
132. the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System if equipped Insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON RUN position NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position in order to drive the vehicle e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the message Insert Key Turn To On will flash in the EVIC until you insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch Once inserted the message Turn To On will flash in the EVIC until you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position e Remote Start Active Key To Run will display in the EVIC until you insert and turn the key to ON RUN position Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC for further information Remote Start Comfort Systems If Equipped When remote start is activated the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather In warm weather the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and deactivated through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For more information on Remote Start Comfort System operation refer to Electronic Vehicle 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE
133. the engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as Ethanol Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso line containing more than 10 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability prob lems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi nate Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10 Ethanol Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10 Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under warranty E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty ee STARTING AND OPERATING 533 If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see
134. the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 17 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi T tion As engine coolant temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the tempera ture gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle I
135. the front passenger air bag unless the air bag is turned off An air bag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc tion are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Children should remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower An chors and Tether for CHildren LATCH ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 All children whose weight or height is above the WARNING forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts e Improper installation can lead to failure of an fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over infant or child restraint It could come loose in a the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against collision The child could be badly injured or the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster killed Fol
136. the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled STARTING AND OPERATING 541 e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines ps that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indicator will display in the EVIC telltale display area Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or pillar 542 STARTING AND OPERATING es This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the Month Day and Hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of y
137. the mode control to x and turn on to keep windows clear e Set the mode control to the sf position If windshield Cold Weather fogging starts to occur move the control towards the 3 position 8000cb71 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures illl 375 W Automatic Transmission 378 Normal Starting 00 375 Key Ignition Park Interlock Automatic Transmission 375 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System Extreme Cold Weather Four Speed Automatic Transmission Below 20 F Or 29 C isses 376 3 7L Engine If Equipped 380 If Engine Fails To Start 376 Six Speed Automatic Transmission 4 7L And 5 7L Engine After Starting i4 sr RR desea a E Rer ed 377 1500 Models Only ce 390 H Engine Block Heater If Equipped 377 Six Speed Automatic Transmission 5 7L Engine 2500 Models Only 401 370 STARTING AND OPERATING Se ll Four Wheel Drive Operation If Equipped Manually Shifted Transfer Case If Equipped cess is gan s keeper Shifting Procedure Manually Shifted Transfer Cases so ics cg weep aie ars ia eo erra Transfer Case Position Indicator Light Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Four Position Switch If Equipped Shifting Procedu
138. the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect Phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo cal name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 e Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred e You can say O letter O for 0 zero e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e Ina convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise smooth road surface 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone e Echo at the phone far end can sometimes
139. the vehicle e If your child restraint seat is not LATCH compatible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belting 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Installing The Child Restraint System WARNING Do not install child restraint systems equipped with LATCH mechanisms in the center position of a Quad Cab rear seat or Crew Cab model with a bench rear seat A child may be placed in the rear center seating position of a Quad Cab or Crew Cab bench model using the seat belt and child tether anchorage The LATCH anchorages in the rear seat are designed for the two outboard seating positions for Quad Cab Crew Cab with a full bench rear seat and all three positions for Mega Cab Quad Cab and Crew Cab with a split bench rear seat Failure to follow this may result in serious or fatal injury We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rearward facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook and means for adjusting the tension in the strap In general you will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector
140. to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your vehicle Improperly secured cargo can fly around in a sudden stop or collision and strike someone in the vehicle causing serious injury or death Handle 2 Fold the seatback down and push the seat forward 030907365 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 WARNING An improperly latched seat could cause serious in jury or death Make sure that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback in not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear ee impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top Rear Passenger Fold Flat Seats of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear 3 Lift the seatback to return the seat to the upright position Be sure the seat is locked in place 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed wh
141. to control the move ment of the seat cushion and the seatback 030905752 Power Seat Switches 1 Power Seat Switch 2 Power Seatback Switch Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 WARNING Continued Reclining The Seatback The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or a rearward Push the seatback switch forward or rearward Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release shoulder belt is no longer resting against your the switch when you have reached the desired position chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could
142. to gain maximum traction ee STARTING AND OPERATING 451 WARNING On vehicles equipped with a limited slip differential never run the engine with one rear wheel off the ground since the vehicle may drive through the rear wheel remaining on the ground You could lose control of the vehicle Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when both rear wheels are on a slippery surface This could cause both rear wheels to spin and allow the vehicle to slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a turn DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc 452 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following pr
143. to the lower anchor ages and tether anchorages Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here Again carefully follow the instruc tions that come with the child restraint system ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the The chart below defines the seating positions with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or Driver Center Passenger killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly CRS Lock CRS Lock CRS Lock when installing an infant or child restraint First Row N A N A ALR Second Row ALR Cinch ALR Installing The Child Restraint Using The Vehicle Third Row ALR N A ALR Seat Belts The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are a Appheiik equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate or both Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt For Regular Cab Ouly tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary Driver Center Passenger to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting First Row N A ALR ALR noise if you extrac
144. to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON RUN position A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 021805728 Power Door Lock Switch Location 1 Unlock 2 Lock 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M If you press the power door LOCK switch while the Key Fob is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from accidentally locking your Key Fob in the vehicle Remov ing the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to operate A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in the ignition switch and a door is open as a reminder to remove the Key Fob Automatic Door Locks If Equipped When enabled the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer per written request of the customer Please see your authorized dealer for service Auto Unlock Doors If Equipped This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when either front door is opened This will occur only after the vehicle has been shifted into the PARK position after the vehicle has been driven shifted out of PARK and all doors closed Auto Unlock Doors Programming If Equipped The Auto Unlock Doors feature can be enabled or
145. turer recommends the use of 89 octane for RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD 89 STARTING AND OPERATING 531 optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC speci fications if they are available 532 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability for
146. turn the headlight switch out of the AUTO position 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features SETUP in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Headlight Delay To aid in your exit your vehicle is equipped with a headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for approximately 90 seconds This delay is initiated when the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is on and then the headlight switch is cycled off Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight switch on then off or by turning the ignition ON The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features SETUP in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Parking Lights And Panel Lights DO To turn on the park
147. vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result NOT
148. weather The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically shutting off The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch bank below the climate controls T 031705825 Press the switch to turn on the heated steering wheel The light on the switch will illuminate to indicate the steering wheel heater is on Pressing the switch a second time will turn off the heated steering wheel and light indicator NOTE The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical conditions must exer cise care when using the steering wheel heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures espe cially if used for long periods Do not place anything on the stee
149. wheel drive vehicles make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GIW 3 GAWR 4 Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight 556 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Towing Requirements Tires e When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting and Operating for proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s e Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe GVWR and GAWR limits and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Oper ating for proper tire inflation procedures Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury e Do not attempt to tow a trailer with less than the full size spare tire Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes e Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage befo
150. winch in and up to power the winch out The winch will stop if the switch is left in the neutral center position CAUTION If not installed the hook strap must be placed on the hook Fairlead The fairlead acts as a guide for the wire rope and minimizes damage to the rope 460 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Winch Accessories The following accessories are necessary to attach the winch to anchors change direction of pull and for safe winching 8149d0ee Gloves Wire rope through use will develop barbs which can slice skin It is ex tremely important to wear protective gloves while oper ating the winch or handling the wire rope Avoid loose fit ting clothes or anything that could become entangled in the wire rope and other mov ing parts 8149d0ea Snatch Block Pulley Used properly the multi purpose snatch block allows you to 1 increase the winch s pulling power and 2 change your pulling direction without damaging the wire rope Proper use of the snatch block is covered in Before You Pull E STARTING AND OPERATING 461 8149d0e6 8149d0fd Clevis D Shackles The D Shackle is a safe means of connecting the looped ends of cables straps and snatch blocks The shackle s pin is threaded to allow easy re moval Tree Trunk Protector Typi cally made of tough high quality nylon it provides the operator an attachment point for the winch rope to a wide variety of anchor poi
151. window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Window LOCKOUT Switch 4 Door Models The window LOCKOUT switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window control on the rear passenger doors To disable the window controls on the rear passenger doors press the window LOCK button into the latched or down position To enable the window controls press the window LOCK button again and return the switch to the released or up position THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 Window Lockout Switch 1 Window Lockout Switch Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or in partially open positions This is a 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee normal occurrence and can be minimized If the rear windows are open and buffeting occurs open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passe
152. with force resulting in serious injury Reinstalling The Jack And Tools 1500 Series 1 Lower the jack all the way down by turning the jack turn screw until the jack is snug 2 Position the jack and tool bag unrolled Make sure the lug wrench is under the jack near the jack turn screw Turn Screw And Lug 588 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 3 Fold the flap and roll the jack tool kit into a cylindrical package in direction of arrows and tie to the jack using the tie straps 81054ece Tying Bag To Jack With Straps 81054f07 Folding Flap And Rolling Bag WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 589 81054ed3 Jack And Tools Tied Jack And Tools 1500 Series 4 Place the jack and tools in the storage position holding the jack by the jack turn screw slip the jack and tools under the seat so that the bottom slot engages into the fastener on the floor and then secure to the floor pan using the wing bolt Reinstall the plastic cover 590 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES g XT Ww J 060507579 Jack And Tools 2500 3500 Series Removing The Spare Tire Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the truck Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube Insert the tube through the access hole between the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch mechanism tube Rotate the wheel wrench handle coun terclockwise until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack to
153. 000 Ibs Gooseneck 4540 kg Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drive train All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg without added equipment or altera tions to the standard equipment 550 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Ram 1500 4x2 ST SLT Outdoorsman Sport Laramie 3 7L V 6 4 Speed Automatic Transmission Towing 3 750 Ibs 1701 kg max Payload 1 860 Ibs 839 kg max 4 7L V 8 6 Speed Automatic Transmission Towing 5 000 Ibs 2268 kg std 7 600 Ibs 3447 kg max Payload 1 700 Ibs 771 kg max Towing 5 000 Ibs 2268 kg std 7 650 Ibs 3470 kg max Payload 1 730 Ibs 785 kg max 5 7L HEMI V 8 6 Speed Automatic Transmission Towing 5 000 Ibs 2268 kg std 10 400 Ibs 4717 kg max Payload 1 660 lbs 753 kg max Towing 5 000 lbs 2268 kg std 10 450 lbs 4740 kg max Payload 1 670 Ibs 757 kg max Towing 5 000 lbs 2268 kg std 10 050 Ibs 4559 kg max Payload 1 610 lbs 730 kg max ee STARTING AND OPERATING 551 Ram 1500 4x4 ST SLT Outdoorsman Sport Laramie 4 7L V 8 6 Speed Automatic Transmission 5 7L HEMI V 8 6 Speed Aut
154. 08 dh rog eae d ene dt eas 139 Rear Folding 005 150 151 Reclining 6248 foe aed oe ee GE ae 148 Reclining Rear 2 0 0 0 0 cee ee eee 150 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 19 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 639 676 Sentry Key Immobilizer 0 16 Sentry Key Programming 4 18 Sentry Key Replacement 0 17 Service Assistance 2 0 cee eee 699 Service Contract 0 0 es 701 Service Manuals 0 0 llle 703 Setting the Clock sss RR Re 290 299 Settings Personal deduce esa eee e es 282 Shift Lever Override llle 610 SHINE os osx ume Re ER RE e DS 378 Automatic Transmission 380 390 401 Transfer Case siis uer xu RR EX EA 414 Transfer Case Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N esses 573 575 Transfer Case Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N lessen 574 578 Short Message Service SMS 126 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 50 Shoulder Belts llle 41 Side Airbag oes desees te t e STR RN e i 64 Signals Tutti ses yese ede e en 89 168 250 en INDEX 723 Sliding Rear Window Power magae std Reena eor oS NE RD MER 221 Snow Chains Tire Chains 512 Snow Plow eee 566 Snow lites sarres ipress wie bekei e keka vos 514 Spare Tire 22e dg da ee Hog a aca nre 506 507 Spark Plugs ice hehe Rho RPERR PEE 676 Speed
155. 1 Hood Release x dea dm DER eee a hee oe 160 Hub Caps eee Has Hoe eGo eae galt 4 599 TEMIN 2 2 20 od tee teh eer GT Aen ee RE 14 Key ausa Gai te ad ain apa a eee s 12 14 Ignition Key Removal lesse 14 Illuminated Entry 0 0 0 0 cee ee eee 20 Immobilizer Sentry Key llle 16 Infant Restraint 0 0 00 000 cee eee 70 71 Inflation Pressure Tires oe ssc asesi reser seisa 511 Inside Rearview Mirror llle 98 Instrument Cluster 716 INDEX ee Instrument Panel and Controls 245 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 656 Integrated Power Module Fuses 658 Integrated Trailer Brake Controls 557 Interior Appearance Care 0005 654 Interior Lights a ciere Een tiraa nka 165 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 170 Introduction isses n Rm ren 4 Inverter Outlet 115V llle 208 Jack Location sen REPRE ERES 584 Jump Starting zxesssebeawese gy exa bx des 604 Key In Reminder 0 0 00 cee eee 16 Key Programming 60660 18 Key Replacement 0 00000 eee eee 17 Key Sentry Immobilizer 0 16 Keyless Entry System sses 6s eg n en 21 KEYS oi ae dies Aged Baers a alk Beers e Bee ae 12 Lane Change and Turn Signals 168 Lane Change ssist se sssrds gud e a nn 168 Lap Belts 414554494 RERES EAR TRE AG 50 Lap Shoulder Belts 00000 41 LA
156. 1 Ves AUX2 Enter to Select xi WEATHER WEATHER Pi The Weather Channel FA The Weather Channel Mother Nature 00 00 Select FM Mode On The VES Screen 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Using The Touch Screen Radio Controls 1 Press the MENU hard key on the radio faceplate 2 Touch the Rear VES soft key to display the Rear VES Controls If a channel list is displayed press the HIDE LIST soft key to display the Rear VES Controls screen DVD Video Menu ep Display Setting FEB My Files DVD Setup Fm Screen a Saver Sirius Traffic On Screen Disp AEN D View Picture View System Setup Play Pause ls Audio Control at Rear VES Soft key 3 To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a video is playing on Channel 1 touch the 2 soft key and choose an audio source To exit touch the back arrow soft key at the top left of the left screen m Rear VES Controls by Favorites M Ves 00 12 HDD MESE TRK 1 of 109 DISC AUX1 AUX AUX2 SCAN INFO 12 00 amp LOCK 010107714 Select Channel Screen 2 And HDD In The MEDIA Column A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 Important Notes For Single Video Screen System VES is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio simultaneously In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1 and right side equates to Channel 2 If a video source is selected on Channel 1 then Channel 2 is for audio only Selecting a video
157. 5 7L engine oper ating under a gross combined weight rating of 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg or greater SAE 5W 30 engine oil is recom mended for all operating temperatures Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils if the recommended oil quality requirements are met and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added To Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection The manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil 7 filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recomm
158. 5 fuel or any mixture of E 85 Badge these two For best results a refueling pattern that Ethanol Fuel E 85 alternates between E 85 and unleaded gasoline should be E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and avoided Ini nnleseueeSo Man When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that e you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1 4 full 538 STARTING AND OPERATING Se e you do not add less than 5 gallons 19 Liters when refueling e you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for a period of at least 5 minutes Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up NOTE e When the ambient temperature is above 90 F 32 C you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed e Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E 85 and may form deposits in your engine To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits a supplemental gasoline additive such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E 85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in MOPAR engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufacturer re quir
159. 5 kg These items could be thrown about en dangering occupants of the vehicle Items stored should not exceed a total of 10 Ibs 4 5 kg Pull on the upper handle on the front of the armrest to raise the cover The upper storage area contains a 12 Volt power outlet that can be used to power small electrical devices refer to Electrical Power Outlets for further information Center Storage Compartment UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 035305807 035305808 Upper Storage Compartment Lower Storage Bin With the upper lid closed pull on the lower handle to open the lower storage bin 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart ment lid in the open position Cellular phones music players and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury Second Row In Floor Storage Bin If Equipped In floor storage bins are located in front of the second row seats and can be used for extra storage The storage bins have removable liners that can be easily removed for In Floor Storage Bin And Latch cleaning To open in floor storage bin lift upward on the handle of the latch and open the lid UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 NOTE The front seat may have to be moved forward to Sea
160. 621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 701 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions abo
161. 9 Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Voice Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the Voice Command vr button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect Voice For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Driver s Power Seat If Equipped Some models may be equipped with an eight way power driver s seat The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the driver s seat cushion There are two 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se power seat switches that are used
162. AM band say AM or Radio AM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 e Menu Radio to switch to the radio menu Disc To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you may say the following commands Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite Track 8 to change the track Radio In this mode you may say the following com e Next Track to play the next track 3 mands e Main Menu to switch to the main menu e Previous Track to play the previous track Ch l h he ch l it f s Daane i aries io change vues channeh SES e Main Menu to switch to the main menu spoken number Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In e Previous Channel to select the previous channel this mode you may say the following commands e Next Channel to select the n
163. AUTION e Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Continued 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads WARNING Improper towing can lead to a collision Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 555 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Continued grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK For four
164. All hould al heir 1 d Ine ee ee ee severe injuries in a collision The air bags work shoulder belts properly with your seat belt to restrain you properly In 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Always wear your seat belts even though you have Front Air Bags room to inflate air bags 4 Do not lean against the door or window If your Continued vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WARNING Continued e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air Bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though
165. Always keep remote control lead clear of the drum wire rope and rigging e Inspect for cracks pinches frayed wires or loose connections Replace if damaged e Be careful not to pull the Winch Cable Collar through the rollers Watch and listen to Winch for proper snugness A o ae gl 1 Inspect the winch winch mount and wire rope for damage Do not use the winch if the mount is loose or rope shows excessive wear or damage 2 Put on gloves ee STARTING AND OPERATING 465 3 Disengage the clutch to allow free spooling of the 4 Free the winch hook and attach the hook strap Free winch drum rotate the clutch lever on the winch to the winch hook from its anchor point Attach the hook disengage Freespooling conserves battery power strap to the hook if not attached 814a0dd4 Free Spool Hook Strap 466 STARTING AND OPERATING 5 Pull the wire to the anchor point Pull out enough wire 6 Secure to the anchor point Once you have established rope to reach your anchor point Be sure to keep a certain your anchor point secure the tree trunk protector or amount of tension on the wire as it can become twisted choker chain around the object and over wrapped when slackened leading to wire rope damage To prevent losing the end hold the hook strap while you work 8149d10f Tree Trunk Protector 814a0dd8 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 467 CAUTION Always be certain the anchor you select will with stand
166. BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter preted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas
167. Check 2 22 cea ER Cea 644 Master Cylinder 0 000004 644 Parking wae xia dSot de x en per e enis 478 Warning Light 00 00050 260 Brake Transmission Interlock 380 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 85 Bulb Replacement 00000000000 665 Bulbs Eight is acniavecteeeetihessedieas 89 664 Cab Top Clearance Lights coets saras amass zs 671 Calibration Compass 000000000 eee 281 Camera Rear 710 INDEX eee Camp et s iae Vu ae erae RR eae 238 Capacities Fluid usi weeds ales ereere ahh eas 674 Caps Filler OU Engine idea cdi eade aie eae 628 Power Steering 21 4 sctewa sae sae e p ge 477 Radiator Coolant Pressure 640 Car Washes 0 0c eee eee ee eee 652 Carbon Monoxide Warning 86 535 Cargo Light cute ee Tie eo ES 166 Cellular Phone 0 0 000 cee rski 105 355 Center High Mounted Stop Light 669 Center Lap Belts 50 Center Seat Storage Compartment 214 Certification Label llle 541 Chart Tire bizitig sivc Rer RR ee baw es 494 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 264 624 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 85 Checks Safety i esperes e aes aoe 85 Child Restraint llle 70 72 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 76 80 Child Seat 45s css mre RR 4009400445 78 Cigar Lighter i cogs nre does Re nm DER RR na 207
168. D or four wheel drive position AWD AUTO for normal street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads Driving the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD For variable driving conditions the 4WD AUTO mode can be used In this mode the front axle is engaged but the vehicle s power is sent to the rear wheels Four wheel ee STARTING AND OPERATING 423 drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction Because the front axle is en gaged this mode will result in lower fuel economy than the 2WD mode When additional traction is required the transfer case 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position Refer to Shifting Procedure for spe cific shifting instructions The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause in creased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo nents NOTE The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected by depressing the recessed button located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only Refer to Recreational Towin
169. D OPERATING 505 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Radial Ply Tires The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four or six in the case of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine them with other types of tires mm WARNING Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h 506 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and wheel in
170. DING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 Using HomeLink aerasi 197 vrai Cm 198 Troubleshooting Tips 198 General Information 199 ower Sunroof If Equipped 200 Open Sunroof Express Mode 201 Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 201 Closing Sunroof Express 201 Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 201 Pinch Protect Feature sese 201 Pinch Protect Override sss 201 Venting Sunroof Express 202 Sunshade Operation presisa trass rass 202 Wind Buffeting Sunroof Maintenance Ignition Off Operation Bl Electrical Power Outlets ll Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver If Equipped H Power Inverter If Equipped ll Cupholders Front Instrument Panel Cupholders 40 20 40 Seats Front Instrument Panel Cupholders Floor Mounted Shifter Rear Cupholder Quad Cab Rear Cupholder Crew Cab 202 CA paa add LAG AG WA CO RE di 211 Glove Box Storage 000 0 211 Door Storage cohesd ute ce eae toed aa 213 Center Storage Compartment IfEquipped i e 214 Second Row In Floor Storage Bin If Equipped 2a ees thee oen desee dn at 216 seatback Storage ss sacs re enn 217 Storage Regular Cab
171. DING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Replacing The Batteries Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for operation To replace the batteries e Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of the headphones and then slide the battery cover downward Replace the batteries making sure to orient them according to the polarity diagram shown e Replace the battery compartment cover Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Warranty Who Does This Warranty Cover This warranty covers the initial user or purchaser you or your of this particular Unwired Technology LLC Unwired wire less headphone Product The warranty is not transfer able How Long Does The Coverage Last This warranty lasts as long as you own the Product What Does This Warranty Cover Except as specified below this warranty covers any Product that in normal use is defective in workmanship or materials What Does This Warranty Not Cover This warranty does not cover any damage or defect that results from misuse abuse or modification of the Product other than by Unwired Foam earpieces which will wear over time through normal use are specifically not covered replace ment foam is available for a nominal charge UNWIRED TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULT ING FROM THE USE OF OR ANY FAILURE OR DE FECT IN THE PRODUCT NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL SPECIAL DIRECT INDIRECT
172. E The TPMS telltale is also accompanied by a Low Tire message in the odometer Base Cluster or in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC screen indicating Low Tire for EVIC enabled clusters 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 26 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of t an onboard diagnostic OBDII system which monitors the emissions and engine control sys tem If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on as a bulb check until the engine is started If the vehicle is not ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on for 15 seconds then blink for 5 seconds and remain on until the vehicle is started If the bulb does not come on during starting have the condition investigated promptly If this light comes on and remains on while driving it suggests a potential engine control problem and the need for system service Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required WARNING A malf
173. E position e the transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem perature e the engine coolant antifreeze has reached an ad equate temperature e vehicle speed is sufficiently high and e the TOW HAUL switch has not been activated When To Use TOW HAUL Mode When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL switch to select TOW 400 STARTING AND OPERATING Se HAUL mode This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When operating in TOW HAUL mode transmission upshifts are delayed and the trans mission will automatically downshift for engine brak ing during steady braking maneuvers 051210733 TOW HAUL Switch The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW HAUL mode has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation If the TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerati
174. EHICLE Se NOTE e When reinstalling the IOD fuse push firmly until fully seated the gauges in the instrument cluster will do a full sweep when the ignition switch is turned to the RUN position This is a normal condition e When the vehicle is shipped from the factory the IOD fuse is in the up or extracted position If the radio interior lamps keyless entry or other features do not work with the key OFF check the position of the fuse or check to see if the fuse is blown to ensure that it is fully seated When the IOD fuse is extracted the instrument cluster in the odometer window will dis play NO FUSE REPLACEMENT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb No Overhead Console Lamps TS 212 2 Dome Lamp ues RR RR ae ye Sele 7679 NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base Aluminum base bulbs are not approved LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb No Dual Headlamp 00005 H13 Quad Headlamp Low Beam H11 Quad Headlamp High Beam 9005 Front Turn Signal Lamp Dual Headlamp 3157K Front Turn Signal Lamp Quad Headlamp 3157NA Fog Latmip z 83 oh ee van care Se REY 9145 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL 921 Rear Cargo Lamp eso te vy Be ee a thee 921 Cab Roof Marker Lamps 194NA Rear Tail Turn and Stop Lamp 3157K Rear Lamp Bar ID
175. ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 13 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 14 Oil Pressure Gauge The pointer should always indicate some oil pressure when the engine is running A continuous high or low reading under normal driving conditions may indicate a lubrication system malfunction Immediate service should be obtained from an authorized dealer 15 OdometerlTrip Odometer Button ECO Fuel Saver Indicator Button If Equipped Press this button to toggle between the odometer display trip odometer display or the ECO display in the base cluster Holding the button in resets the trip odometer reading when in trip mode If equipped with Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the ECO message will be displayed in the EVIC display in the instrument cluster Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped for further information ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 16 Odometer Display Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Area If Equipped Odometer Display The odometer display shows the total distance the ve hicle has been driven U S Fed
176. Full Size Spare If Equipped 507 Limited Use Spare If Equipped 507 Tre Spinning ere RR RE ER 508 Tread Wear Indicators 509 Life Of ue izgerga dete ERR en 509 Replacement Tires s ore erase e mn 510 ll Supplemental Tire Pressure Information If Equipped ze RR ee ER RRRS 511 503 Mi Tire Chains ee RR RR 512 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 373 MSnow Tires 0 2 eee ee ewE s 514 Reformulated Gasoline 532 H Tire Rotation Recommendations 515 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 532 Directional Tires If Equipped 516 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 532 Dual Rear Wheels If Equipped 516 MMT In Gasoline 000 533 lll Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 517 Materials Added To Fuel 534 base 5yst t iis REESE GER 520 Fuel System Cautions Premium System If Equipped 522 Carbon Monoxide Warnings Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS Tire lll Flexible Fuel 4 7L Engine Only Light Load Inflation Switch Description If Equipped ss sacs es ob ent eh gece 536 OEE SIE EERE fc see ee oes ne E 85 General Information isses 536 General Information 530 Ethanol Puel BAR sic criacsitidrisii 537 Bl Fuel Requirements n on
177. INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL EXEMPLARY PU NITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339 NATURE WHATSOEVER Some states and jurisdictions may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation may not apply to you This warranty gives you specific legal rights You may also have other rights which vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction What Will Unwired Do Unwired at its option will repair or replace any defective Product Unwired re serves the right to replace any discontinued Product with a comparable model THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WAR RANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE If you have any questions or comments regarding your Unwired wireless headphones please phone 1 888 293 3332 or email customersupport unwiredtechnology com You may register your Unwired wireless headphones online at www unwiredtechnology com or by phone at 1 888 293 3332 System Information Shared Modes This allows the VES to output radio sources to the headphones and the radio to output VES sources to the vehicle speakers When the radio and VES channel 1 or 2 are in the same shared mode a VES icon will be visible on the radio s display for that chann
178. If a cut out is E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 not available in the glove compartment route the cable away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the lid to close without damaging the cable Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s iPod USB MP3 control system iPod or external USB device may take a few minutes to connect the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE If the audio device battery is completely dis charged it may not communicate with the iPod USB MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod USB MP3 control system may charge it to the required level Using This Feature By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to USB port e The audio device can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata artist track title album etc information on the radio display e The audio device can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e The audio device battery charges when plugged into the USB AUX connector if supported by the specific audio device Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons To get into the iPod USB MP3 control mode and access a connected audio device either press the AUX button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button a
179. M19 25 Amp Automatic Shut ITM Siren Natural down 1 and 2 Multifunction M20 15 Amp Instrument Cluster Switch Steering Bl Interior Liehti Column Module ne c d ME Sw Steering M14 20 Amp Back Up Camera Wheel Sw Bank Yellow Domestic Only M21 20 Amp Automatic M15 20 Amp _ Power Seat Yellow Shutdown 3 Yellow Module s Audio Telematics Daytime Md HEP ene Red Right Running Lights 2 Relay Instrument M23 10 Amp Horns Low High Cluster Transfer Red Left Case Module M25 20 Amp Fuel Pump Motor M16 10 Amp Airbag Module Yellow Diesel Lift Pump Red If Equipped 662 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M26 10 Amp Driver s Door M34 10 Amp Park Assist Red Switch Red Module Climate M27 10 Amp Ignition Switch Control System Red Module IR Sensor M28 15 Amp Powertrain Control Compass Module Blue Module M35 15 Amp Left Front amp Rear M29 10 Amp Tire Pressure Blue Parklamps Red Monitor M36 20 Amp Power Outlet In Yellow strument Panel or M30 15 Amp J1962 Diag Blue Connector Y TES os M E mp tilock Brakes iin S a Red Stability Control A System Module M32 ue Airbag Module Stoplamp Switch M38 25 A All Door Lock M33 10 Amp _ Powertrain Control N d amp U at Red Module ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 663 CAUTION VEHICLE
180. N which you will later need to enter into your mobile phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process e For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a name for your mobile phone Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name e You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect Phone However at any given time only one mobile phone can be in use connected to your Uconnect System The priority allows the Uconnect Phone to know which mobile ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the Uconnect Phone will use the priority three mobile phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section Dial By Saying A Number Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will app
181. NDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337 Controls The headphone power indicator and controls are located on the right ear cup NOTE The rear video system must be turned on before sound can be heard from the headphones To conserve battery life the headphones will automatically turn off approximately three minutes after the rear video system is turned off Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones 1 Ensure the Remote Control channel screen selector switch is in the same position as the headphone selector switch NOTE e When both switches are on Channel 1 the Remote is controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned to the audio of the VES Channel 1 e When both switches are on Channel 2 the Remote is controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned to the audio of the VES Channel 2 2 Press the MODE button on the remote control 3 If the video screen is displaying a video source such as a DVD Video pressing STATUS shows the status on a popup banner at the bottom of the screen Pressing the MODE button will advance to the next mode When the mode is in an audio only source such as FM the Mode Selection menu appears on screen 4 When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navigate to the available modes and press the ENTER button to select the new mode 5 To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu press the BACK button on the remote control 338 UNDERSTAN
182. NG CAUTION To avoid serious injury or death e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will discharge the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER IF For vehicles equipped with an optional floor shifter EQUIPPED NU X A removable ash receiver and cigar lighter are available BT For vehicles with a bench seat the cupholder tray can be used to hold the ash receiver a Optional Floor Shifter 1 Cigar Lighter 2 Ash Receiver 034805613 Ash Receiver and
183. NG THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se You can either press the Uconnect Phone button to restore the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect Phone For best results the Voice Training session should be com pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only Reset e press the amp button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup then Reset This will delete all phone pairing phone book entries and other settings in all language modes The System will prompt you before resetting to factory settings Voice Command e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period e Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents
184. PAR Type MS 6560 lithium based grease or equivalent Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit After lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder 634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dir
185. RAINED then release both buttons NOTE e It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cased for the channel to train e If the EVIC displays DID NOT TRAIN repeat from Step 2 5 At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the LEARN or TRAINING button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener device motor Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button On some garage door openers devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener device is in the LEARN TRAIN mode NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 6 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time The EVIC will display CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete NOTE If the garage door opener device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until t
186. RATING 521 turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Service TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The TPM Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors Vehicles With Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound a LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will be displayed and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON 3 Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h will turn off th
187. S in this section to select a lower gear range Under these conditions using a lower gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup If the transmission operating temperature exceeds normal operating limits the powertrain controller will modify the transmission shift schedule and expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating If the transmission becomes extremely hot the Trans mission Temperature Warning Light may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmission cools down NOTE Use caution when operating a heavily loaded vehicle at low speeds such as towing a trailer up a steep grade or in stop and go traffic during hot weather In these conditions torque converter slip can impose a significant additional heat load on the cooling system Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possible gear when climbing a grade or shifting to NEUTRAL when stopped in heavy traffic can help to reduce this excess heat generation 396 STARTING AND OPERATING Se During cold temperatures transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed This feature im proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency Engagement of both the torque converter clutch and the top
188. S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home or other limited viewing uses other wise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DO Dolby Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby MLP Lossless and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Confidential unpublished works Copyright 1992 1997 Dolby Laboratories All right re served es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353 General Information This system complies with Part 15 of the FCC Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches Siem 045035190 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center Pressing the top of the switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the switch will decrease the volume 354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME The button located in the center of the right hand control w
189. S OF YOUR VEHICLE 233 036706570 Aligning Gate To Slots Side Gates Closed 3 Rotate the side gates closed so that the outboard ends 5 Lock the center handle to secure the panel into place are secured into the intended slots of the bed and assist against theft 4 Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side Extender Position gates in the closed position The extender position allows you to load the bed of the truck beyond the tail gate The bed extender will add an additional 15 in 38 cm in the back of the truck when 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M additional cargo room is needed The extender position 2 Make sure the center handle is unlocked and rotate the utilizes a locating pin and rotating handlelocated on both center handle vertically in order to release the extender sides of the truck bed near the tailgate side gates 3 Fit the end of the side gate ends onto the pin and handle 036706569 Extender Position par To install the bed extender into the extender position 036706571 perform the following Extender Installation 1 Lower the tailgate UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 4 Rotate the handles to the horizontal position to secure WARNING into place To reduce the risk of potential injury or property damage e Cargo must be secured Do not exceed cargo load rating of your vehicle Secure all loads to truck utilizing cargo tie downs Extender should
190. STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features System Setup in Understanding Your Instru NS ment Panel e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may DOOR LOCKS cause serious injury or death Manual Door Locks For personal security and safety in the event of an Front and rear doors may be locked by moving the lock accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as knob down or unlocked by moving the lock knob up well as when you park and leave the vehicle Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and re move the key fob from the ignition When leaving Doors locked before closing will remain locked when the vehicle always lock your vehicle closed Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Front doors may be opened with the inside door handle without lifting the lock knob The emergency key will unlock the driver door lock on your vehicle Continued E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 WARNING Continued Power Door Locks If Equipped A power door LOCK switch is on each front door trim e Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors dangerous for a number of reasons A child or E others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not
191. STORAGE If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days we e When installing the totally integrated power mod recommend that you take the following steps to mini ule cover it is important to ensure the cover is mize the drain on your vehicle s battery properly post ioned and sull latched Ballare toj 4 Disconnect the Ignition Off Draw IOD fuse located in do so may allow water to get into the totally integrated power module and possibly result in a electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected the Integrated Power Module located in the engine compartment The IOD cavity includes a snap in re tainer that allows the fuse to be disconnected without removing it from the fuse block As an alternative to the above steps you may discon nect the negative cables from both batteries Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again 664 MAINTAINING YOUR V
192. Seat Belt 49 Utility Rails Rear Cargo Area 236 726 INDEX ae Variance Compass ias ee ges 281 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading 2234457446404 Rea 499 541 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Storage etenei se er Redes 366 663 Voice Recognition System VR 134 Voltmeter llle 259 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 246 250 Warnings and Cautions 0004 6 Warranty Information 06 702 Washers Windshield 170 634 Washing Vehicle 1 llle 652 Water Driving Through 00004 452 Wheel and Wheel Trim 0 4 653 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care Lss 653 Wheel Cover persas iau E RRGCD re ER 599 Wheel Nut Torque sees 600 Winch ace nC PER OE eat I RUE ER DU SEA ERE 456 Accessories ens 460 Op ration duse eed RR a RON RR Rn 461 Rigging Techniques 4c e xe 474 UT PIT 456 Wind Buffeting Libre ees RR he 37 202 Window Fogging llle eee 366 MWihdoWS us suae a dc Ea Eq RASTA 34 POWEP 2iiiuuGex e Ox eR Sheen ey ee 34 Rear sliding 243 046 t Re exe 221 Windshield Defroster llle 88 Windshield Washers 169 170 634 Hlud sige eg daa RR RE xa 169 634 Windshield Wiper Blades 634 Windshield Wipers 0 2 20 000000 cae 169 Wiper Blade Replacement
193. System TCS If Equipped The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake 482 STARTING AND OPERATING ME pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS functions similarly to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section of this manual This brake pressure modulation transfers drive torque from slipping to non slipping wheels to provide optimal forward traction Brake Assist System BAS If Equipped The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The BAS detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes The system applies optimum pressure to the brakes in emergency braking conditions This can help reduce braking dis tances The BAS complements the ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of BAS you must apply
194. T 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes a
195. TCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 76 Latches 222 re Reb edt SETA 89 Leaks Eh d i 223zz ki 3e YE ee eho 89 Life of Tires uoce 26 sae noe Be ee Ree 509 Light Bulbs 4 6c ee Rs mas 89 Lights 5i cese steep oe hei aoe dad 89 162 Airbag sek m aco timid 63 64 69 87 265 Alari ueni RUE CHER REESE 254 AntLock 2 2 ea mes 265 Automatic Headlights 163 Brake Assist Warning 4 490 Brake Warning ee ce hem me 260 Bulb Replacement 664 665 Cap Top Clearance seme 671 Cal BO dac dra seed Pap Sad acc Ee eck 166 Center Mounted Stop lille 669 Check Engine Malfunction Indicator 264 Courtesy Reading lille 190 Daytime Running 0 00005 167 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 490 EXterlor idc faa ee era ree E se Pe des 89 Fog eese c em x ex E 164 265 667 Four Wheel Drive Indicator 415 Hazard Warning Flasher 583 Headlights s gare singi eug em n i eee 163 High Beam 2 ee 168 259 High Beam Indicator 0004 259 High Beam Low Beam Select 168 Illuminated Entry 20045 20 Instrument Cluster 05 246 250 Interiot ouem oed SR 165 190 Lights On Reminder 167 Low Fuel 2343442396309 pnr E EES 259 ee INDEX 717 Oil Pressure uuo does each aee ea 261 Passing bac hk a be eG teaa dsa 168 Seat Belt Reminder LL 266 S
196. TING AND OPERATING 507 Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emerge
197. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2WD Rear Wheel Drive High Range This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads 426 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 4WD AUTO Four Wheel Drive Auto Range This range sends power to the rear wheels The four wheel drive system will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction Additional traction for varying road conditions 4WD LOCK Four Wheel Drive Lock Range This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only 4WD LOW Four Wheel Drive Low Range This range provides low speed four wheel drive Locks the front and rear drive shafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h N Neutral This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information Shifting Procedure NOTE e If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have n
198. URES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the vn button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the vn button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transf
199. Vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels can not be stored under the vehicle because the wheel retainer will not fit through the wheel pilot hole Secure the flat tire in the bed of the truck Have the flat tire repaired or replaced immediately WARNING A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immedi ately Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down Slide the wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and position it properly across the wheel opening For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation stow with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle Attach the wheel wrench to the extension tube Rotate the winch mechanism until the wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle Continue to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism slip or click three or four times It cannot be overtightened Push against the tire several times to be sure it is firmly in place 604 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME HOISTING A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking locations Refer to the graphics that show jacking loca tions However a floor jack or frame hoist must never be used on any other parts of the underbody CAUTION Never use a floor jack directly under the differential housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle may result JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES If your ve
200. When HIGH speed is selected both lights on the switch will be illuminated When LOW speed is selected one light will be illuminated qum NOTE The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models equipped with remote start the drivers ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Manual Seat Adjuster If Equipped Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward The manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat cushion at the front edge of each seat 030905746 Manual Seat Adjuster While sitting in the seat pull up on the handle and slide the seat forward or backward Release the bar once you have reached the desired position Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Manual Reclining Seats If Equipped The recliner handle is used to adjust the seatback position e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous and is located on the outside of the seat cushion Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be ad
201. While a track is playing press the INFO button to see the associated metadata artist track title album etc for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 to the next screen of data for that track Once all screens have been viewed the last INFO button press will go back to the play mode screen on the radio Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio device mode to repeat the current playing track or press the VR button and say Repeat ON or Repeat Off Press the SCAN button to use iPod USB MP3 de vice scan mode which will play the first 10 seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when it is playing the track press the SCAN button again During Scan mode pressing the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons will select the previ ous and next tracks RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod or external USB device or press the VR button and say Shuffle ON or Shuffle Off If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON List Or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described below will bring up List mode List mode enables scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the audio device e TUNE control knob The TUNE contro
202. a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot coolant to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing e If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling 7 system should be pressure tested for leaks e Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components 644 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs
203. acturer for this information There are unique electrical systems that must be connected to properly assure operator safety and prevent overloading vehicle systems WARNING Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely affect performance of the airbag system in a collision Do not expect that the airbag will perform as de scribed earlier in this manual CAUTION The Lamp Out indicator could illuminate if exte rior lamps are not properly installed Before Plowing e Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper fluid level e Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper tight ness e Check the runners and cutting edge for excessive wear The cutting edge should be 1 4 to 1 2 in 6 cm to 1 2 cm above ground in snow plowing position Check that snowplow lighting is connected and func tioning properly Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability For Information about snowplow applications visit www ramtrucks com or refer to the current Body Build ers Guide 1 The maximum number of occupants in the truck should not exceed two 568 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 2 The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear GAWR should never be exceeded 3 Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition of options or passengers etc The loaded vehicle weight including the snowplow system all aftermarket accessories driver passengers options and cargo must not exceed either the Gross Vehicle Weight GVWR
204. al right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on until the lever is released High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to switch the headlights to high beam Pulling the multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn the low beams back on or shut the high beams off UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 031464209 High Low Beam Switch Windshield Wiper Washer Switch WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield Wiper Operation Windshield Wipers Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper operation The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the multifunction lever Turn the end of the handle to select the desired wiper speed 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Intermittent Wiper System The intermittent feature of this system was designed for use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable For maximum delay between cycles rotate the control knob into the upper end of the delay range The delay interval decr
205. all the memory setting for driver two press MEMORY button number 2 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons on the drivers seat during a recall S 1 or 2 When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat driver s mirror and the pedals stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked To Memory 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the key 2 Press and release MEMORY button number 1 The system will recall any memory settings stored in position 1 Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3 3 Press and release the memory S SET button located on the driver s door 4 Within five seconds press and release MEMORY button 1 on the driver s door 5 Within five seconds press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either memory position repeat steps 1 through 5 for each RKE transmitter NOTE Once programmed all RKE transmitters linked to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Easy Entry Exit Seat This feature provides automatic driver s seat po
206. ammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery 1 Setthe parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories a 060809873 Positive Battery Post 606 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park CAUTION the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF Failure to follow these procedures could result in WARNING damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the could establish a ground connection and personal positive post of the discharged vehicle injury could result 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper Jump Starting Procedure cable to the positive post of the booster battery WARNING 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery Failure to follow this procedure could result in per Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to a good engine ground exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle s engine away from the battery and the fuel injection system sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex plosion en WHAT TO
207. an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO SALES CODE RES RSC NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 042340030 Media Center 130 RES RSC Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at
208. an damage your transmission components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 649 CAUTION Continued e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid will require more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fur ther information Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals Fluid Level Check The fluid level should be checked when the engine is fully warmed up and the fluid in the transmission is at normal operating temperature Operation of the trans mission with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transmission and of the fluid Check the fluid level whenever the vehicle is serviced Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal operating temperature 82 C 180 F This occurs after at least 15 miles 25 km of dri
209. ance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Continued 536 STARTING AND OPERATING Se FLEXIBLE FUEL 4 7L ENGINE ONLY IF EQUIPPED E 85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve hicles only These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Un leaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles 81ae46ab E 85 Fuel Cap CAUTION Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can operate on E 85 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 537 WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame 524 Euel Requirements Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E 8
210. and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed STARTING AND OPERATING 515 The suggested rotation method is the forward cross
211. and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec reational Vehicle dealer for additional information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 547 057003770 057003769 EXAMPLE Without Weight Distributing EXAMPLE With Weight Distributing Hitch Correct Hitch Incorrect 548 STARTING AND OPERATING xe EXAMPLE Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect 057003768 Fifth Wheel Hitch The fifth wheel hitch is a special high platform with a coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle in the truck bed It connects a vehicle and fifth wheel trailer with a coupling king pin Gooseneck Hitch The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup truck The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted over the rear axle in the truck bed Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition ee STARTING AND OPERATING 549 Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I Light Duty 2 000 lbs 907 kg Class II Medium 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg Duty Class III Heavy Duty 5 000 Ibs 2268 kg Class IV Extra 10 000 Ibs 4540 kg Heavy Duty Fifth Wheel Greater than 10
212. ansmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed the c clip The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine a complete stop WARNING Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the Remember to disconnect the engine block heater vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution ee STARTING AND OPERATING 379 WARNING WARNING Continued e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dan those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and remove the key fob Once the key fob is removed the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle Continued gerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the p
213. arately Blindspot Mirror ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehi cle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone NOTE The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the Uconnect website for supported phones For Uconnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket
214. are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 WARNING Continued e f itis necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent m
215. ark Assist sensors e Channel X training e Front Park Assist Not available Blinded e Rear Park Assist Not available Blinded e Channel X trained e Did not train e Low Fuel e Memory 1 Profile Set Service blind spot system e Memory 2 Profile Set Blind spot system off e Memory System Unavailable Not in Park 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e Memory 1 Profile Recall e Memory 2 Profile Recall e Adjustable Pedals Unavail Veh in Reverse e Adjustable Pedals Unavail Cruise Engaged EVIC Warning Lights e Door Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that one or more doors may be ajar o Oil Pressure Warning Light E This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood e Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging sy
216. arking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in the vehicle A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal 380 STARTING AND OPERATING es Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK OFF position The key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK OFF position and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position unless the brakes are applied To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON RUN position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Four Speed Automatic Transmission 3 7L Engine If Equipped The shift lever position display located in the instrument panel cl
217. around the winch drum Always pass remote control through a window to avoid pinching lead in door then using remote inside a vehicle Never leave the remote control plugged into the winch while free spooling rigging or sitting idle en STARTING AND OPERATING 463 General Information Vehicle Recovery Using The Winch Practice using your winch before you get stuck Some key CAUTION points to remember when using your winch are 1 Always take your time to assess the situation and plan e Always Know Your Winch Take the time to fully your pull carefully read and understand the included Installation and Operations Guide and Basic Guide to Winching Techniques in order to understand your winch 3 Use the right equipment for the situation and the winching operation Always inspect winch installation and wire rope 2 Always take your time when using a winch 4 Always wear leather gloves and do not allow the wire rope to slip through your hands when handling the rope condition before operating the winch Frayed kinked or damaged wire rope must be replaced 5 Only the operator should handle the wire rope and immediately Loose or damaged winch installation remote control must be corrected immediately Always be sure any element which can interfere with safe winching operations is removed prior to initiating winching 6 Think safety at all times Continued 464 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION Continued e
218. assenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo rary emergency use only Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter T or S molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design mm standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 494 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T or S Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in
219. ate Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 695 WARNING e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Vehicle s 3 5 oes oo Sota gees ema D ls 699 Speech Impaired TDD TTY 701 Prepare For The Appointment 699 dervice Contract vise cee sed ee Re S 701 Prepare A List oni4ss22c erede esris 699 W Warranty Information 702 Be Reasonable With Requests 699 BMOPAR Parts 702 H if You Need Assistance 04 699 W Reporting Safety Defects 702 Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 700 In The 50 United States And Washington Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 700 De aia cert irises eet i
220. ate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in accidents Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped The seat belts for both front seating positions may be equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices may
221. ave the person 438 STARTING AND OPERATING Se stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see the obstacle watch your tires and undercarriage and guide you through Crossing Large Rocks When approaching large rocks choose a path which ensures you drive over the largest with your tires This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is designed to take the abuse Always look ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires CAUTION e Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough to strike your axles or undercarriage e Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large enough to contact the door sills Crossing A Ravine Gully Ditch Washout Or Rut When crossing a ravine gully ditch washout or a large rut the angled approach is the key to maintaining your vehicle s mobility Approach these obstacles at a 45 degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle independently You need to use caution when crossing large obstacles with steep sides Do not attempt to cross any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover If you get caught in a rut dig a small trench to the right or left at a 45 degree angle ahead of the front tires Use the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created You should now be able to drive out following the tren
222. ays CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Non Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remain ing steps Canadian Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada United States that require the transmitter signals to time out after several seconds of transmission Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button while you press and release cycle your hand held transmitter every two seconds 4 Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHAN NEL TRAINED then release both buttons NOTE e It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cased for the channel to train e If the EVIC displays DID NOT TRAIN repea
223. b Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must b
224. black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 es STARTING AND OPERATING 497 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure
225. but cool conditions Floor Mode Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount through the defrost and side window demist outlets Mix Mode Ge Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost Mode W Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use the DEFROST mode with maximum blower and warm temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX and DEFROST or a blend of these modes even if the A C button is not pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359 Recirculation Control e In cold or damp weather the use of the Recirculation Press this button to choose between mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because outside air intake or recirculation of of moisture buildup inside the vehicle For maximum the air inside the vehicle A LED will defogging select the outside air position illuminate when you are in Recircula tion mode Only use the Recirculation asss mode to temporarily block out any outside odors smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidl
226. button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the Uconnect Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Mobile Phones e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the amp button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the button and say Uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the Uconnect Phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the vn button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the 4vr button and say the Voice Training System Training or Start Voice Training command 124 UNDERSTANDI
227. can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the Voice Com mand VR button and say Help or Main Menu Commands The Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command vn button 2 Say a command e g Help 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command vr button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands Radio to switch to the radio mode Disc to switch to the disc mode Memo to switch to the memo recorder Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM To switch to the
228. catalytic converter dam age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions 638 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Ss Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but no
229. ccelerator pedal after turn ing the control switch If the vehicle is stopped the ignition switch must be in the ON position with the engine either running or off This shift cannot be com pleted if the ignition switch is in the ACC position NOTE The four wheel drive system will not allow shifts between 2WD 4WD LOCK if the front and or rear wheels are spinning no traction In this situation the selected position indicator light will flash and the origi nal position indicator light will remain ON At this time reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift 2WD Or 4WD LOCKs 4WD LOW NOTE When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may be heard This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h or completely stopped You can use either of the following procedures Preferred Procedure 1 With the engine running slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 While still rolling rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is ON not flashing shift the transmission back into gear ee STARTING AND OPERATING 421 Alternate Procedure NOTE e If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the 2 With the ignition switch in the ON positi
230. ce between the rear fascia bumper and the detected obstacle UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 ParkSense Display WARNING When the vehicle is in REVERSE the warning display Object will turn ON indicating the system status detected Park Assist System On ParkSense Warning Display 032733376 032733373 Park Assist System On 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE N H AO Park Assist System Off RP 0 0mi 032733373 Park Assist System Off The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing three solid arcs and will produce a one half second tone As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow to fast to continuous WARNING Object detected Slow Tone 032733376 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 WARNING Object detected WARNING Object detected 032733377 032733378 Fast Tone Continuous Tone The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING ALERTS Reduced Rear Distance Greater than 79 39 in 39 25 in 25 12 in Less than in cm 79 in 200 cm 200 100 cm 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 12 in 30 cm A
231. ce cc secite db ieoten n eee 118 ne INDEX 725 TEaetlon cum S400 a eR ieee a ER es 451 Traction Control ix loss RET ER 481 Trailer Sway Control TSC 491 Trailer TOWING exar hor OR S Ree BR ea 544 Cooling System Tips 05 565 Isidor ME EAM 548 Minimum Requirements 554 MITOS os scat onte deese dpa dean datae 104 Trailer and Tongue Weight 553 Wiring ses Resa oe tenp ges 563 Trailer Towing Guide 0000 549 Trailer Weight ie n m 549 Transfer Case vct ek e dee e 648 Electronically Shifted 415 422 FIG 6c 455 6 eR RR E pa ae RE 678 TransmissiOn snoi jane nad ile eS Baw aes 380 Automatic sess 380 390 401 648 Idi p PP 678 Mairitenanc i429 x dope dern anges 648 SHINE Sadan ee re Une Fac eg 378 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 00 25 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 0 0 21 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 191 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 21 Tread Wear Indicators 0040 509 Trip Odometer sce eae er Rx 254 255 Turn Signals 000004 168 250 665 667 UCI Connector i e e n n nn 313 Uconnect Hands Free Phone 105 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 705 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 313 Universal Transmitter 00 00040 191 Untwisting Procedure
232. ce on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2WD Rear Wheel Drive High Range This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads ee STARTING AND OPERATING 419 4WD LOCK Shifting Procedure Four Wheel Drive Lock Range This range locks the front NOTE and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range provides additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only 4WD LOW Four Wheel Drive Low Range This range provides low speed four wheel drive It locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range provides additional traction and maxi
233. cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep Redial Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect Phone to the mobile phone An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Uconnect Phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the fol
234. ch you just created at a 45 degree angle WARNING There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing an obstacle at any angle with steep sides ee STARTING AND OPERATING 439 Crossing Logs To cross a log approach it at a slight angle approxi mately 10 to 15 degrees This allows one front tire to be on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the log While climbing the log modulate your brake and accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your tires Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes CAUTION Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will become high centered Getting High Centered If you get hung up or high centered on an object get out of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung up on where it is contacting the underbody and what is the best direction to recover the vehicle Depend ing on what you are in contact with jack the vehicle up and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high point when you let the vehicle down You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object CAUTION Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects increases the risk of underbody damage Hill Climbing Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under standing of your abilities and your vehicle s limitations Hills can cause serious problems So
235. cidents in cluding those resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESC equipped ve hicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dan gerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESC Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESC function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would nor mally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESC Off switch Once the situa tion requiring ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion ee STARTING AND OPERATING 489 WARNING In the Partial O
236. ck 9 Engine Oil Fill 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Battery 11 Engine Coolant Reservoir 6 Integrated Power Module Fuses MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 4 7L 071305565 1 Air Cleaner Filter 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 3 Engine Oil Dipstick 9 Engine Oil Fill 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Battery 11 Engine Coolant Reservoir 6 Integrated Power Module Fuses 622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L 1 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 3 Engine Oil Fill 4 Engine Oil Dipstick 5 Brake Fluid Reservoir 6 Battery 971405704 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 8 Integrated Power Module Fuses 9 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 10 Coolant Pressure Cap 11 Engine Coolant Reservoir ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems requir
237. ck Brakes Blue Lamps Park Lamps Green Pump Stability J15 40 Amp Front Blower Control System Green J07 30 Amp Antilock Brakes J17 40 Amp Starter Motor Pink Valve Stability Green Solenoid Conal oen Ji8 20 Amp Powertrain Control J08 40 Amp Power Seat Blue Module Transmis Green sion Range J10 30 Amp Sway Bar Module Pink If Equipped 660 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse J19 60 Amp Rad Fan Motor HI M7 20 Amp Power Outlet Rear Yellow Rad Fan Motor Yellow Console or Center Low Seat J20 30 Amp Front Wiper M8 20 Amp Front Heated Seat Pink Ground Low High Yellow _ amp Steering Wheel J21 20 Amp Washer Control M9 20 Amp Rear Heated Seats Blue Yellow J22 25 Amp Sunroof Module M10 15 Amp Hands Free Natural Blue Module Vanity M1 15 Amp Stop Switch Lamp Lamp Universal Blue Garage Door M5 25 Amp 115V AC Inverter Opener Module Natural M11 10 Amp Climate Control M6 20 Amp Power Outlet Red ystem Yellow Instrument Panel M12 30 Amp Radio Amplifier or Front Console Green Rain Snsr MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 661 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M13 20 Amp Main 2 Instrument M18 15 Amp Center Stop Lamp Yellow Cluster Wireless Blue Control Module
238. ck begins Single Video Screen NOTE Typically there are two different ways to operate the features of the Video Entertainment System VES e The Remote Control e The Touch Screen Radio If Equipped Play A DVD 1 Press the OPEN CLOSE or LOAD hard key on the radio faceplate Touch Screen Or Press the LOAD button then corresponding number 1 6 where the DVD is to be loaded Non Touch Screen 2 Insert the DVD with the label facing up The radio automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts playing the first track 3 Ensure the VES Remote Control and the Headphone switch is on Channel 1 Using The Remote Control 1 Press the MODE button on the Remote Control 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 2 While looking at the video screen highlight DISC by either pressing Up Down Left Right buttons or by re peatedly pressing the MODE button then press ENTER on the Remote Control EH Select Mode AM DISC FM AUX SAT Ves DISC HDD Ves AUX1 Ves AUX2 Enter to Select L2 EX WEATHER S 4 gt MUTE Preset 10 5 WEATHER Wl The Weather Channel Fa The Weather Channel PA Mother Nature 12 00 Select DISC Mode On The VES Screen NOTE The VES system will retain the last setting when turned off Using The Touch Screen Radio Controls 1 Press the MENU hard key on the radio faceplate 2 Touch the Rear VES soft key to disp
239. come projectiles in an off road situation When To Use Low Range When driving off road shift into 4L Low Range for additional traction or to improve handling and control on slippery or difficult terrain Due to the lower gearing low range will allow the engine to operate in a higher power range This will allow you to idle over obstacles and down hills with improved control and less effort Also use 4L Low Range in rain ice snow mud sand to get heavy loads rolling improve traction or whenever 4H High Range traction will not do the job Driving In Snow Mud And Sand There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in snow mud or sand The vehicle will be less responsive to steering acceleration and braking inputs Therefore you should accelerate slowly leave greater stopping distances and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers You want to keep a slow constant steady pace The key is to maintain the vehicle s momentum 436 STARTING AND OPERATING Se e Snow In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at slower speeds shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer case to 4L Low Range if necessary Do not shift to a lower gear than neces sary to maintain headway Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a turn quickly back and forth while still applying throttle This will allow th
240. compartment 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Mega Cab Rear Seat Features WARNING Reclining Rear Seats If Equipped The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat cushion To adjust the seatback lift upward on the handle lean back on the seatback and when you reach the desired position release the handle Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death Folding Rear Seat Table Mode If Equipped Both the left and right rear seatbacks can be folded down and used as a table To fold down either rear seatback 1 Lift the handle located next to the head restraint 030307362 Rear Seat Recliner Handle 030907363 Table Mode Handle 2 Fold the seatback forward 030907364 Table Mode 3 Lift the seatback to return the seat to the upright position Be sure the seatback is locked in place Folding Rear Seat If Equipped Both the outboard rear seats will drop and move forward when the seatback is folded flat 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING To fold either rear seat flat 1 Lift the handle located on the outboard side of either e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or of the rear seats outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely
241. complished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position Refer to Shifting Procedure in this section for specific shifting instructions The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo nents NOTE The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected by pressing the recessed button located on the lower left hand corner of the AWD Control Switch The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights 4WD and 4LOW are located in the instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection When you select a different transfer case position the indicator lights will do the following If All Shift Conditions Are Met 1 The current position indicator light will turn OFF 2 The selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift ee STARTING AND OPERATING 417 3 When the shift is complete the indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met 1 The indicator light for the current position will remain ON 2 The newly
242. conds to reset m features BACK Button Press the BACK button to scroll back to a previous menu or sub menu EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages e Left front turn signal lamp out 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Right front turn signal lamp out Left rear turn signal lamp out Right rear turn signal lamp out Service air filter Perform service ESC System Off Coolant Low Check Trailer Brake Wiring Service Trailer Brake System Trailer Brake Connected Lights On RKE Battery Low ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped Wrong Key Damaged Key Key not programmed Key In Ignition Turn Signal On Park Assist System On Park Assist System Off Oil Change Due gt Dealer Info Warning Object Detected Service Park Assist System System Setup Unavailable Vehicle Not in Park Remote start aborted Door ajar Remote start aborted Hood ajar ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 e Remote start aborted Fuel low e Blind spot detection unavailable e Remote start active Key to Run e Automatic High Beams on e Remote start disabled System fault e Automatic High Beams off e System Setup Unavailable Vehicle in Motion e Clearing channels l m manual transmission s Channels cleared e Remote Start Disable Start Vehicle to Reset e Channels defaulted e Service Four Wheel Drive System e Channel X transmitting e Clean P
243. continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING e The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 483 WARNING Continued e The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped The HSA system is designed to assist the driver in launching a vehicle on an incline HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver inputs for a short duration once the driver takes his foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short duration the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the incline The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied During operation HSA will activate the brake control system and a clicking noise may occur If your foot is on the brake pedal
244. ct bulb size and type for replacement An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp the bulb socket or the lamp wiring NOTE There are access covers over both headlamp bulb access holes in the quad front lamp unit housing if 9 Remove the headlamp assembly Grasp the outboard equipped These covers MUST be reinstalled after the edge of the lamp and pull it straight forward to disen bulb has been replaced gage the ball stud from the plastic grommet 073306875 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 667 Fog Lamps Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup Lamps 1 Reach under and behind the front bumper to access 1 Remove the two screws that pass through the bed the back of the front fog lamp housing sheetmetal 2 Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness connector from the fog lamp bulb 3 Rotate the bulb counterclockwise 1 4 turn to unlock the bulb from the housing 4 Pull the bulb straight out from the housing CAUTION Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces Shortened bulb life will result 4 668 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2 Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward far 3 Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the enough to unsnap the two receptacles on the outboard bulb socket side of the lamp housing from the two plastic snap post 4 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise 1 4 turn t
245. ctivated When to Use TOW HAUL Mode When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL switch to select TOW HAUL mode This will improve performance and reduce to excessive shifting When operating in TOW HAUL mode the transmission will downshift into third gear 051210733 TOW HAUL Switch NOTE TOW HAUL mode locks out Overdrive 390 STARTING AND OPERATING Se The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW HAUL mode has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation If the TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations the clutch automatically disengages NOTE The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm usually after 1 to 3 miles 1 6 to 4 8 km of driving Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shift
246. cupant Restraints Lap Shoulder Belts Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage Center Lap Belts Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions Automatic Locking Retractor ALR Mode If Equipped Energy Management Feature Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Seat Belt Extender 55 Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bags shite sig a ad eb ee alk tee 56 Air Bag System Components 57 Advanced Front Air Bag Features 58 Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls 62 Event Data Recorder EDR 69 Child Restraints lll Engine Break In Recommendations E Safety Tips Transporting Passengers Exhaust Gas 5 59 ie Mea gg oe dos Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle i222 ene e EAE Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE If Equipped Your vehicle may use a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmit
247. d NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Hill Start Assist HSA When on is selected the HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ses Operating for system function and op
248. d If ingested by a child To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up pressure cap while the system is hot or under any ground spills immediately pd Checking Coolant Level 3 7L 4 7L And 5 7L Do not use a pressure cap other than the one Engines specitied for your vehicle Personal injury or en with the engine OFF and cold the level of the engine gine damage may result coolant should be between the MIN and MAX range on the dipstick 642 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE To check the coolant level 1 Open the coolant reservoir 3 Check the coolant level on the dipstick 072639276 2 Lift and remove the plastic dipstick from the reservoir neck ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 643 The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing en gine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles a few kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally
249. d and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the ABS are also equipped with E
250. d by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the inside mirror The mirror will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts Illuminated Vanity Mirror If Equipped Illuminated vanity mirrors are located on each sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward The lights will turn on auto matically Closing the mirror cover turns off the light UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 To use the Slide On Rod feature rotate the sun visor downward and unclip it Pull the sun visor along the Slide On Rod until the sun visor is in the desired position Illuminated Vanity Mirror Slide On Rod Features Of Sun Visor If Equipped The sun visor Slide On Rod feature allows for addi tional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the Slide On Rod Extender sun 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Trailer Towing Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror head to provide a greater vision range when towing extra wide loads To change position inboard or out board the mirror head should be rotated flipped in or out Trailer Towing Position NOTE Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to entering an automated car wash A small blindspot mirror is located next to main mirror and can be adjusted sep
251. d to the ON RUN position To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button 2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Once the vehicle has started the engine will run for 15 minutes NOTE If your power door locks were unlocked Remote Start will automatically lock the doors e If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on
252. d axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible 450 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a collision If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL The limited slip differential provides additional traction on snow ice mud sand and gravel particularly when there is a difference between the traction characteristics of the surface under the right and left rear wheels During normal driving and cornering the limited slip unit per forms similarly to a conventional differential On slip pery surfaces however the differential delivers more of the driving effort to the rear wheel having the better traction The limited slip differential is especially helpful during slippery driving conditions With both rear wheels on a slippery surface a slight application of the accelerator will supply maximum traction When starting with only one rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface slight momentary application of the parking brake may be necessary
253. d it is unable so can result in the system misinterpreting a close to recognize every obstacle including small ob object as a sensor problem causing the SERVICE stacles Parking curbs might be temporarily de PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message to be displayed in tected or not detected at all Obstacles located the instrument cluster above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense e On vehicles equipped with a tailgate ParkSense should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE A lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING WARNING Continued e Drivers must be careful when backing up even e Before using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist when using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sys tem Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedes trians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued System it is
254. d may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving e During snowplow usage on vehicles equipped with outside temperature display the display may show higher temperatures than the outside ambient tem perature The higher displayed temperature is due to blocked or reduced airflow to the underhood ambient temperature sensor caused by the snowplow In addi tion on vehicles equipped with Automatic Tempera ture Control ATC it is suggested that the interior cabin temperature be manually controlled should the system not perform as desired while in automatic mode Both the outside temperature display and ATC operation will return to normal when the snowplow is removed Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metall
255. d torque to the values specified in the Service Manual e Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts e After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have the radiator fan brake rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a collision If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary 456 STARTING AND OPERATING Se e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation WINCH USAGE POWER WAGON ONLY IF EQUIPPED Things To Know Before Using Your Winch General Winch Information Your vehicle is equipped with an electric vehicle recovery winch This winch uses the electrical power from the vehicle charging system to power a motor that winds wire rope into the winch drum via planetary gear reduc tion By nature a winch is capable of generating very high forces and should be used with care Do not operate the winch wi
256. dal Continued 404 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued CAUTION e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure e Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and remove the key fob Once the key fob is removed the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key fob in the vehicle A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK OFF position to the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position e When shifting into PARK pull the shift lever toward you and move it all the way counterclockwise until it stops e Release the shift lever
257. de Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center 694 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se gt damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary i 144 000 Miles 234 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service 152 000 Miles 247 000 km or iB Schedule 114 Months Maintenance 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule M Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before Change the engine oil and engine oil A 144 000 miles 234 000 km filter Dl 2 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of C engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary irregular wear even if it occurs before E Nn Replace the top row of spark plugs 4 7L Engine 152 000 miles 247 000 km S 1 Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only T Lube the front drive shaft fitting C 11 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 2500 3500 4x4 models only TE Inspect the CV joints faq Inspect exhaust system IM 4 Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for U L E S M Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading D
258. de simply press and hold the ERS switch until D is once again displayed in the shift lever position indicator in the instrument cluster WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing an accident or personal injury Screen Display 1 2 3 4 5 6 ID Actual Gear s 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 6 Allowed NOTE To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration engine braking simply press and hold the ERS switch down The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive fifth and sixth gears The trans mission will automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if the following conditions are present e the shift lever is in the DRIVE position e the transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem perature e the engine coolant antifreeze has reached an ad equate temperature e vehicle speed is sufficiently high and e the TOW HAUL switch has not been activated When To Use TOW HAUL Mode When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL switch to select TOW 410 STARTING AND OPERATING Ses HAUL mode This will improve performance
259. de of the front seats inflate Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios fs Meere etc Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE When the air bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each air bag deploys independently a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right side impact deploys the right air bag only Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC If Equipped SABIC air bags may offer side impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The SABIC deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Label Location NOTE e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag depl
260. der Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ses Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front row outboard seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt away from your neck Squeeze the anchorage button lo cated on the upper belt guide to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that fits you best i Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Center Lap Belts The center seating position for the Quad Cab Mega Cab and Crew Cab front seat has a lap belt only To fasten the lap belt slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click To lengthen the lap belt tilt
261. dimmer control is in the Dome ON position extreme top position e The illuminated entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the dome defeat position extreme bottom position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a Key Fob with RKE transmitter The transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into the ignition switch disables the system from responding to any button presses from that RKE transmitter Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 020207434 Key Fob With Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transmitter Remote Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door If EVIC is setup for driver door first otherwise this will unlock all doors or press the unlock button twice within five 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es seconds to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First This feature lets you program the system to unlock eithe
262. dio Controls 1 Press the MENU hard key on the radio faceplate 2 Touch the Rear VES soft key to display the Rear VES Controls If a channel list is displayed press the HIDE LIST soft key to display the Rear VES Controls screen UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331 NOTE DVD Video Menu ESAE To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO MEDIA sae NEI hard key on the radio faceplate then touch the DISC PERS m Po tab soft key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft key Sirius Traffic On Screen Disp Default Viewing a DVD on the Touch Screen radio screen is View not available in all states provinces and the vehicle LEX eds apaa Se must be stopped and the shift lever must be in the Picture Rear VES E View PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmis ws Map sion In vehicles with manual transmission the parking Audio Control ENERT View brake must be engaged e Touching the screen on a Touch Screen radio while a Rear VES Soft key DVD is playing brings up basic remote control func 3 Touch the 1 or 2 soft key based on the channel you tions for DVD play such as scene selection Play want to change and then the DISC soft key in the MEDIA Pause FF RW and Stop Pressing the X in the upper column To exit touch the back arrow at the top left of the corner will turn off the remote control screen screen functions 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Remote Control VCR 05254 Remote Control C
263. drive until the transmission cools down During cold temperatures transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed This feature im proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency Engagement of the torque converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch in this section During extremely cold tempera tures 20 F 29 C or below operation may briefly be limited to second gear only Normal operation will re sume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level 386 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in second gear regardless of which forward gear is selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam aging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift the transmission into PARK 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK OFF position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5
264. during operation you may feel a slight pedal movement The clicking and pedal movement is normal and both will stop when HSA becomes inactive HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 7 or greater incline e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction ie vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear 484 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 7 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer where the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur which could cause a collision with an other vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle The system will only work if the intended direction of the vehicle and vehicle gear match For example if the intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is in DRIVE and the activation criteria are met HSA will activate The system will work in REVERSE and all forward gears and will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL Towing And Hauling With HSA The HSA system does not know if your vehicle is loaded or towing a trailer unless the TOW HAUL switch lo cated on the center stack is selected When activated the TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster Refer to Automatic Transmission
265. e A c a O PRND 4 d lil 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Tachometer The tachometer indicates engine speed in Revolutions Per Minute RPM x 1000 CAUTION Do not operate the engine with the tachometer pointer at high RPM for extended periods Engine damage may occur 2 Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated NOTE e Acontinuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on e Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator remains on and does not flash or flashes at a rapid rate 3 Fuel Gauge Shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the ON RUN position 4 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner t
266. e Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced 055007576 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire STARTING AND OPERATING 509 These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death 510 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wea
267. e Ini Mexico Contact e Bs eee ie 700 in ANACAN inchs y Faisaien pacc deed 698 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ME lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Traction Grades 0 000000 eee 705 Quality Grades 3 bx e ERR ad 705 Treadwe ar zig 4 esate iyi wee Y 705 Temperature Grades 00 706 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 699 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufac
268. e RBZ RHB RHR RHP RHW or RB2 touch screen radio iPod USB MP3 control feature refer to the separate RBZ RHB RHR RHP RHW or RB2 User s Manual iPod USB MP3 control is available only if equipped as an option with these radios This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port located in the glove compart ment 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates NOTE e If the radio has a USB port refer to the appropriate Uconnect Multimedia radio User s Manual for iPod or external USB device support capability e Connecting an iPod or consumer electronic audio device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the iPod MP3 control feature to control the connected device Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external USB device to the vehicle s USB connector port which is located in the glove compartment USB Connector Port NOTE The glove compartment will have a position where the iPod or consumer electronic audio device cable can be routed through without damaging the cable when closing the lid This allows routing of the cable without damaging it while closing the lid
269. e parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position 13 Shift the transmission into gear release the brake l heck i ela evn epee disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move even if the transmission is in PARK The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle 576 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss CAUTION It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL before recre ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop Shift automatic transmission into PARK 2 Turn OFF the engine 3 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position but do not start the engine 4 Press and hold the brake pedal 5 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 6 Press and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL button located by the selector switch The NEUTRAL indicator light will blink while the shift is in progress The light will stop blinking stay on solid when the shift to NEUTRAL is complete 7 After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL light stays on release the NEUTRAL button 8 Start the engine 9 Shift the transmission into REVERSE 10 Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement 11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 with transmission in DRIVE 12 Turn OFF the engine 13 Firmly apply the parking brake 14 Shift t
270. e Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant sion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance in an emergency it should be replaced with the intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as five years or 104 000 miles 169 000 km before replace possible ment To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Continued 640 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosio
271. e TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE PRESSURE text message as long as no tire pres sure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires 522 STARTING AND OPERATING Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors e Various TPMS messages which display in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and e TPM Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a TPM sensor The full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires A spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings IX The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the 4 instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the EVIC will display a LOW TIRE PRESSURE message for a minimum of five seconds and a graphic show
272. e a X V awi owe ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW Gaam KEAR FOG LAMP PTRD LIGNE yt VEXTLATING FAN WOOR LOCA SHROTTLE FOUR WHEEL PATONG TAA DEFRIIST LOWER AR OUTLET CONTROL DNE BRAAT rma jj TOW Ae qv Anes hs Au GRATE vemor Wut WerRUMENT PANEL uamwitoos TUPECK MACONDTON OIRD SENT nein vanwe TOW MALL r A E weo0f5o81 amp 50 A amp LOWER ANCHORE GLOW PLUG E Rum bey i m JWE ARBAR ARBG suana rrer CHLOREN ATEM B FAZASI ot m SRS E c C E MX 5 Aa lt gt id M psa S MALFUNCTION ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL fABSBENGOER DOOR ALAR COwvERTIELE CONVERTIBLE SEE OWNERS Am ELECTRONIC WOICATORUGHT olyema IEUPERAJPE RESTAT SYTE AAAA OFF TEOM m Miso COMDTNMER CONTROL OFF 010533317 6 INTRODUCTION Se WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VAN CONVERSIONS CAMPERS The Manufacturer s Warranty does not apply to body modifications or special equipment installed by van conversion camper manufacturers body builders Refer to the Warranty Information book Section 2 1 C Such equipment includes video monitors VCRs heaters stoves refrigerators etc For warranty coverage and service on these items contact the applicable manufac t
273. e center armrest The glove box is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel and features both an upper and lower storage area 035105803 Glove Box 1 Upper Glove Box 2 Lower Glove Box 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se To open the upper glove box push upward on the handle To open the lower glove box pull on the handle to release release The glove box door will automatically open the latch and lower the door Upper Glove Box Lower Glove Box UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 Door Storage Rear Door Storage Crew Cab Storage compartments are located in both the driver and passenger door trim panels Front Door Storage If Equipped Storage areas and bottle holders drivers side only are located in the door trim panels 035205815 Rear Door Storage Front Door Storage 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Center Storage Compartment If Equipped WARNING The center storage compartment is located between the driver and passenger seats The storage compartment e This armrest is not a seat Anyone seated on the provides an armrest and contains both and upper and armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle lower storage area operation or a collision Only use the center d seating position when the armrest is fully upright In a collision the latch may open if the total weight of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs 4
274. e floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets Mix Mode qe Air comes from the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions It allows you to stay comfortable while keeping the windshield clear Defrost Mode Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use Defrost mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE While operating in the other modes the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog mist or ice on the windshield Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When in A C mode and the ATC is set to a cool temperature dehumidified air flows through the air outlets If Economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the A C mode in the ATC display and deactivate the A C system NOTE e If the system is in Mix Bi Level or Defrost Mode the A C can be turned off but the A C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows e If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select Defrost mode and increase blower speed es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365 Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors or ct high
275. e hia a c ee eee 17 Replacement Parts 0 00000 e eee 625 Replacement Tires 510 Reporting Safety Defects 040 702 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 257 275 Restraint Head isses eS ae ew xa y 153 Restraints Child 0 0 00 eee 70 78 Restraints Occupant iss rw asy ee 38 Rotation Tires resas dse adaa e kE ma ppan aS 515 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 87 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 89 Safety Defects Reporting llle 702 Safety Information Tire 492 Safety VIPS xa s uem EE SHARE ac deed d 85 Safety Exhaust Gas i e 86 Satellite Radio Antenna 04 310 Schedule Maintenance 00005 680 Seat Belt Maintenance 004 656 Seat Belt Reminder sssusa aseri naai ea a 54 Seat Belis ure po E yap aang is 38 41 87 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 50 And Pregnant Women 0005 55 Child Restraint ss oe Rte RS 70 71 74 Extender Front Seat 722 INDEX ees Inspection toe emi DR m eae e 87 PretensionetS 4 vas oad eA ew ERE SED 53 Reminder serari eti siisi l9 14e ms 266 Untwisting Procedure siero cess iaai aras 49 Seals usua der Ger PEG Edd uad 139 149 Adjustment ssa ues eese eR ee Rar aS 139 Sol x 74 Folding Floor llslleesss 221 Heated 4e tree e dm eg oe e AN 143 Memory ios eia orco e bag oes eres 156 POWER 4 24 045 0
276. e in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON RUN and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism e Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism e The RES Media Center is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded EJECT Button Ejecting a CD a Press the EJECT button to eject the CD es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the rad
277. e is required For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped for further information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 11 TOW HAUL The TOW HAUL button is located on the red center stack upper switch bank This light will illuminate when TOW HAUL mode is selected 12 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on mo mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The
278. e service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines d that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indicator will display in the EVIC telltale display area Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press 624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M the SELECT button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it
279. e shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM 2500 MODELS ONLY IF EQUIPPED This vehicle is equipped with electronically locking front and rear differentials These differentials when engaged mechanically lock together the axle shafts forcing the wheels to spin at an equal rate This allows the vehicle to maintain its momentum and prevents it from becoming stuck The locking front and rear differentials should only be engaged during low speed extreme off road situa tions where one wheel is likely to not be in contact with the ground It is not recommended to drive the vehicle with the differentials locked on pavement due to the reduced ability to turn and speed limitations ee STARTING AND OPERATING 429 CAUTION e Do not lock the front or rear axle on hard surfaced roads The ability to steer the vehicle is reduced and damage to the drivetrain may occur when the axles are locked on hard surfaced roads Do not try to lock the rear axle if the vehicle is stuck and the tires are spinning You can damage drivetrain components Lock the rear axle before attempting situations or navigating terrain which could possibly cause the vehicle to become stuck The locking axles are controlled by the axle locker switch The switch has three positions AXLE UNLOCK REAR LOCK and FRONT REAR LOCK Under normal driv ing conditions the switch should be left in the AXLE UNLOCK po
280. e tires to get a fresh bite and help maintain your momentum CAUTION On icy or slippery roads do not downshift at high engine RPMs or vehicle speeds because engine brak ing may cause skidding and loss of control e Mud Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires and is very difficult to get through You should use 4L Low Range with a gear low enough to maintain your momentum without shifting If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth for additional traction Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck They are normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting stuck As a good practice before entering any mud hole get out and determine how deep it is if there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck Sand Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire pressure When crossing soft sandy spots in a trail maintain your vehicle s momentum and do not stop The key to driving in soft sand using the appropriate tire pressure accelerating slowly avoid ing abrupt maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle s momentum If you are going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi 103 kPa to allow for a greater tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 437 surface area Reduced tire pressure will drastically ahead to dete
281. e to the tie rods or mounting plate To fix an uneven stack spool out that Using The Remote Control 472 STARTING AND OPERATING section of the rope and reposition it to the opposite end of the drum which will free up space for continued winching 16 Secure vehicle Once recovery of the vehicle s is complete be sure to secure the vehicle s brakes and put the transmission in PARK Release tension in the wire rope 17 Disconnect the wire rope and disconnect from the anchor 18 Rewind the wire rope The person handling the wire rope should walk the rope in and not let it slide through the hand control the winch at all times 81424738 WARNING To prevent serious injury NEVER put your fingers inside the hook area as you are powering in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 473 NOTE How to spool under no load Arrange the remote control lead so it cannot be caught in the winch Arrange the wire rope so it will not kink or tangle when spooled Be sure any wire rope already on the spooling drum is wound tightly and evenly layered Tighten and straighten the layer if necessary Keep the wire rope under light tension and spool the wire rope back and onto the winch drum in even layers Stop frequently to tighten and straighten the layers as necessary Repeat this process until the winch hook is the same distance as the full length of the remote control from the winch Pinch the hook between your thumb and forefinger and at
282. e wire rope to be at 90 to wind properly onto the spooling drum Increasing Pulling Power In some cases you may find yourself needing more pulling power The use of snatch blocks increases me chanical advantage and that increases your pulling power 475 Double Line 814a4734 Because pulling power decreases with the number of layers of wire rope on the winch drum you can use a snatch block to double line out more wire rope This decreases the number of layers of wire rope on the drum and increases pulling power Start by feeding out enough wire rope to free the winch hook Attach the hook to your 476 STARTING AND OPERATING ME vehicle s frame tow hook and run the wire rope through NOTE a snatch block Disengage the clutch and using the snatch block pull out enough wire to reach your anchor point Do not attach the hook to the mounting kit Secure to the anchor point with a tree trunk protector or choker chain Attach the clevis shackle Attach the shackle to the two ends of the strap chain being careful not to over tighten tighten and back off 1 2 turn POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a s
283. eadlight Switch Location Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog light if equipped lenses that are lighter and less suscep tible to stone breakage than glass lights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing CAUTION Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses Headlights To turn on the headlights rotate the headlight A switch clockwise to the headlight position When the headlight switch is on the parking lights taillights license plate light and instru ment panel lights are also turned on To turn off the headlights rotate the headlight switch back to the O Off position Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch to the AUTO position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 031464204 Automatic Headlight Position When the system is on the Headlight Delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF position To turn the automatic headlights off
284. ear in the display of certain radios Call By Saying A Name Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Add Names To Your Uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Other This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone book entry if desired e Whe
285. eases as you rotate the knob until it enters the low continual speed position The delay can be regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle every one second The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph 16 km h or less Windshield Washers To use the windshield washer push the washer knob located on the end of the multifunction lever inward to the second detent Washer fluid will be sprayed and the wiper will operate for two to three cycles after the washer knob is released from this position If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range the wiper will operate for several seconds after the washer knob is released It will then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If the washer knob is pushed while in the off position the wiper will turn on and cycle approximately three times after the wash knob is released To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Feature When a
286. eatures Of Sun Visor If Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 98 Equipped it s kx ae Ae ete see ea vies 103 Outside Mirrors llis 99 Tatler Toving Minions TOFQUIDDRU zione is Outside Mirrors Folding Feature 100 MUcosnect Hong IVECO ieg a 10 Power Mirrors If Equipped 101 Operation cess eee Os A RAV ANR 107 Heated Mirrors If Equipped 102 Phone Call Features 00 114 Driver s Automatic Dimming Mirror If Uconnect Phone Features 117 Equipped 3a ecce ne doe hx 102 Advanced Phone Connectivity 121 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone 123 General Information 134 ll Voice Command If Equipped 134 Voice Command System Operation 134 Commands 000000000 135 Voice Training ce e e RR en 139 ho AT 139 Driver s Power Seat If Equipped 139 Passenger s Power Seat If Equipped 141 Power Lumbar If Equipped 143 Heated Seats If Equipped 143 Ventilated Seats If Equipped 146 Manual Seat Adjuster If Equipped Manual Reclining Seats If Equipped 40 20 40 Front Bench Seat If Equipped Mega Cab Rear Seat Features Head Restraints lll Driver Memory Seat If Equipped Setting
287. ecau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you ee STARTING AND OPERATING 453 Shallow Standing Water CAUTION Continued Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Caution Driving through standing water may cause dam age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al and Warning before doing so ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil CAUTION transmission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that
288. echanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING Continued Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to Always make sure that floor mats are properly feel the air directed a
289. ection and release the switch To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto Down operation pull up on the switch briefly 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es To open the window part way press to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop Auto Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection 4 Door Models Driver And Front Passenger Door Only If Equipped Lift the window switch fully upward to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop NOTE If the window runs into any obstacle during the auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unex pectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Auto Up Reset It may be necessary at some point in time to reactivate the Auto up Auto down feature To do so perform the following steps 1 Pull the
290. ectronic Range Select ERS feature when the trans mission is sufficiently warm will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive If the vehicle has not been driven for several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans mission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This condition is normal and will not cause damage to the transmission The torque con verter will refill within five seconds after starting the engine FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION IF EQUIPPED Four wheel drive trucks are equipped with either a manually shifted transfer case or an electronically shifted transfer case Refer to the operating instructions for your transfer case located in this section for further informa tion Manually Shifted Transfer Case If Equipped The transfer case provides four mode positions e Two wheel drive high range 2H e Four wheel drive high range 4H e Neutral N e Four wheel drive low range 4L This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H position for normal street and highway conditions such as dry hard surfaced roads 412 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss When additional traction is required the 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear drive shafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by simply moving the
291. ecurity Alarm Theft Alarm 254 SOeFVIGB aue asm Ri Ee Rev EE 664 665 Side Marker eee eae 673 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 254 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 262 517 Traction Control i sese eR una 490 Transfer Case ee ee 415 Tam Signal i22 kl e 89 168 665 667 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 246 250 Limited Slip Differential 450 647 Loading Vehicle s s saranat aede ieh eee 541 Tires 2x sm c estre eR dae gl gee a LE P 498 jid me rp 30 Automatic Door 00000 cee eee 32 Child Protection 0 00000 e eee 32 718 INDEX eee DOOR sesa San paei x Rec en Reo E 3a ied 30 Power Door L iuoGgeracbRERGe aa RH Uds 31 Low Tire Pressure System 05 517 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH as d45a0 0d0 09 40934 HER 4e eae 4 76 Lubrication BOdy 4e eere 633 Maintenance Free Battery 44 630 Maintenance Procedures iliis 626 Maintenance Schedule Liu 680 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 624 Manual Transmission Fluid Level Check supras esnaera aea 648 Lubricant Selection less 678 Manual Service llle 703 Memory Seat gesp cues d ee eas du res 156 Methanol scie res m nes m REESE 532 Mini Irip Computer 2 enekes es 277 Mirrors 54 2239 3 0 4 02 4a BERR dee REOR eR 3d 98 Automatic Dimming sss 98 Electric P
292. ed To lock the front axle move the axle locker switch to FRONT REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph 5 km h The indicator light will be solid when the front axle is locked NOTE The rear axle must be locked before the front axle will lock To unlock the front axle move the axle locker switch to REAR LOCK The FRONT REAR LOCK indicator light will go out when the axle is unlocked NOTE The axle lockers could be torque locked due to side to side loads on the axle Driving slowly while turning the steering wheel from a left hand turn to a right hand turn or driving in REVERSE for a short distance may be required to release the torque lock and unlock the axles To unlock the rear axle move the axle locker switch to AXLE UNLOCK The REAR LOCK indicator light will go out when the rear axle is unlocked ee STARTING AND OPERATING 431 STABILIZER SWAY BAR SYSTEM POWER WAGON ONLY Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic disconnecting stabilizer sway bar This system allows greater front suspension travel in off road situations Due to the use of taller springs this vehicle has an increased ride height of approximately 1 9 in 48 3 mm in the front and 1 5 in 38 1 mm in the rear A major advantage to increasing ride height is the positive effect it has on approach departure and break over angles This system is controlled by the electronic control sway bar switch located on the instrument panel 052307134
293. eering s cu ERR Oe PERERQS Adr 476 Power Steering Fluid Check 477 Bi Multi Displacement System MDS If Equipped 5 7L Engine Only 478 H Parking Brake ll Brake System BE 3500 Dual Rear Wheel Models Only 480 lectronic Brake Control System 481 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 481 Traction Control System TCS It Equipped 422 gre RE 481 Brake Assist System BAS If Equipped 482 372 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped 483 Electronic Stability Control ESC If Equipped suo rese pedes aioe eee a EE 486 ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC Off Indicator Light 490 Trailer Sway Control TSC If Equipped 491 H Tire Safety Information 22s s 492 Tire Markings a edere be alee ea 492 Tire Identification Number TIN 496 Tire Terminology And Definitions 497 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 498 Bl Tires General Information 502 Tire Pressure 2 23 re emm 502 Tire Inflation Pressures Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 505 Radial Ply Tir s zoe em RR 505 Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped 506 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 506
294. ees gee RP ere 250 Qil Pressure 25s Re Ree RE DRUGS 254 Speedometer ssa ban 251 Tachomet r ui eeu be oe nee bade RES 250 Voltmeter 2l 259 Gear Ranges 0 0 0 000000 381 391 402 Gear Select Lever Override 610 General Information 18 26 134 530 Glass Cleaning 0 0 eee eee 655 Grocery Bag Retainer 0004 219 Gross Axle Weight Rating 545 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 544 ee INDEX 715 Guide Body Builders 244 2 ser mes 6 GVWR 4s t tai ed pega alls ee has 542 Hands Free Phone Uconnect 105 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water iss ei a een 452 Hazard Warning Flasher 4 583 Head Restraints muersa tdid tua eee EN ERE 153 Headlights 52r etie y ense erg a 665 Automatic e 163 Clean orc eR oda ER PERSTO EE 655 High Beam y sess rr EE Ren 168 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 168 Lights On Reminder 167 PASSING snus 5 segs expe caesa 168 SWICD icu aes sedie cams SORT De Ras 163 Heated Mirrors llle 102 220 Heated Seats us iege a dare Fr eir dos 143 Heater coe doe d e Ra e eai eg 356 Heater Engine Block 000000 377 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 168 Hitches Trailer Towing cx exe Re ee Chas 548 LioiSng iis suot OK ae eee egy dca d e 604 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 19
295. ehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Remote Unlock Sequence When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is high lighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected RKE Linked To Memory When this feature is selected the memory seat mirror pedals and radio settings will return to the memory set position when the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed If this feature is not selected then the memory seat mirror and radio settings can only return to the memory set position using the seat mounted switch To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has bee
296. el and the shared icon will be visible on the VES screen When in shared mode the same audio source is heard in the shared headphone channel 1 or channel 2 If the radio functions FM AM or SAT are in the shared mode with the VES only the radio is able to control the radio functions In this case VES can share the radio mode but not change stations until the radio mode is changed to a mode that is different from the VES 340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M selected radio mode When shared the radio has priority over the VES or all radio modes FM AM The VES has the ability to switch tuner AM FM SEEK SCAN TUNE and recall presets in radio modes as long as it is not in shared mode When in shared disc both the radio and the VES have control of the video functions The VES has the ability to control the following video modes 1 CD Ability to Fast Forward Rewind Scan and Track Up Down 2 CD Changer in radio Ability to Disk Up Down and program all listed CD controls Fast Forward Rewind Scan and Track Up Down The VES can even control radio modes or video modes while the radio is turned off The VES can access the radio modes or disc modes by navigating to those modes on the VES and activating a radio mode or disc mode Information Mode Display 1 2 3 4 5 8
297. el rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors and e TPM Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a TPM sensor The matching full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare when it is used in place of a road tire Otherwise a spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings IX The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the 4 instrument cluster a LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will display in the EVIC and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will ee STARTING AND OPE
298. en the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original hand held transmit ter e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 WARNING General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry a Your motorized door or gate will open and close Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following while you are programming the universal trans two conditions ceiver Do not program the transceiver if people pets or other obj ects are in the path of the door or 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 3 gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This in cludes most garage door opener models manufac tured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener NOTE without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 e The transmitter has been tested and it complies with 355 3515 or on the Internet at FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications
299. ended 630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Air Cleaner Filter used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are maintenance intervals recommended Maintenance Free Battery WARNING Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can You will never have to add water nor is periodic main provide a measure of protection in the case of engine tenance required backfire Do not remove the air induction system air WARNING cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in s over a battery when attaching clamps If acid serious personal injury splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be Continued
300. ender side gates Center Handle And Lock 1 Center Handle Lock 2 Handle 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2 With the side gates open position the extender fully 3 Rotate the side gates closed allowing the outboard forward in the bed against the front panel ends to be positioned in front of the cargo tie down loops 4 036706567 A Storage Position Cargo Tie Down Loop UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 4 Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side 5 Lock the center handle using the vehicle key to secure gates in the closed position the panel into place and assist against theft Divider Position The divider position is intended for managing your cargo and assisting in keeping cargo from moving around the bed There are 11 divider slots along the bed inner panels 3 which allow for various positions to assist in managing your cargo 036706568 Side Gates Closed 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To install the bed extender into a divider position per form the following 1 Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to release the extender side gates Center Handle And Lock 1 Center Handle Lock 2 Handle 2 With the side gates open position the extender so the outboard ends align with the intended slots in the sides of the bed UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURE
301. ens 377 Break In Recommendations 85 Compartment Identification 620 621 622 Coolant Antifreeze esses 676 Exhaust Gas Caution 00 86 535 Flooded Starting llle 376 Fuel Requirements llle 674 Jump Starting 0 cc eee eee 604 Multi Displacement sess 478 Oll ize RR D Y RRRREER 627 674 676 Oil Filler Cap i scs hoe See 628 Oil Selection ceres 628 674 Oil Synthetic iis ies denen 629 en INDEX 713 Overheating 2004 sei aie e 3 Reza ies 583 Temperature Gauge eresas ak apena a isa 250 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 66 Entry System Illuminated 20 Ethanol 208042 eat Bb nee a ee ae ee ee 532 Event Data Recorder 0 0000 cease 69 Exhaust Gas Caution 000 86 535 Exhaust System 0 0 0 e eee eee 86 635 Exterior Lighting 2 166 se remm ma 163 Exterior Lights 0000000 89 Filters Air Cleaner 3m 9 Oe XCY Ca 630 Engine Oil gt 2s e Rn 629 676 Engine Oil Disposal isses 629 Flashers Wien SISA oo srt ee rae 89 168 250 Flat Tre Stowage xvm an oe ayes ede 603 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruising Range ies edad Re bea ar 539 Engine Qil lobe eb Rb REPRE RES 538 Fuel Requirements 536 537 Maintenance a4 ike ke ei o rer ed xd ges 539 Replacement Parts erais dra caed adirat 539 Iri PC 538 Flooded Engine Starting
302. equipped with a Limited Slip Differential require that 5 oz 148 ml MOPAR Limited Slip Additive or equivalent be added to the gear lubri cant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information The MOPAR Limited Slip Additive or equivalent should be added to the gear lubricant whenever a fluid change is made 2500 3500 Model axles DO NOT REQUIRE any limited slip oil additive friction modifiers 648 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Transfer Case Drain And Refill Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Lubricant Selection Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Fluid Level Check This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler plug The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level position Automatic Transmission Selection Of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only the manufacturer s recommended trans mission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion It is important that the transmission fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid CAUTION e Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals c
303. er M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 684 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Ses 24 000 Miles 39 000 km or 18 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 24 000 miles 39 000 km M Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only 1 Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 32 000 Miles 52 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 32 000 miles 52 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 3 7L and 5 7L Engines Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the transfer case fluid Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end p
304. er an ongoing call 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the QVR button and say Transfer Call Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between your mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone System follow the instructions de scribed in your mobile phone User s Manual List Paired Mobile Phone Names e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To Select or Delete a paired phone being announced press the VR button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sec tions for an alternate way to Select or Delete a paired phone Select Another Mobile Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the Uconnect Phone e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the amp
305. er the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Command button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the amp vr button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the Uconnect Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say one of the following Setup Confirmation Prompts On Setup Confirmation Prompts Off Phone And Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for network signal strength phone battery strength etc ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEAT
306. er to increase fuel economy ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 Distance To Empty DTE Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the RETURN button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 10 miles 16 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display Trip Functions Press and release the ODOMETER TRIP ODOMETER button until one of the following Trip Functions display in the EVIC odometer line e Trip A e Trip B e Elapsed Time Press the ODOMETER TRIP ODOMETER button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion e Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset e Elapsed Time Sho
307. er to the following website addresses e http www ramtrucks com e http www ramtruck ca Canada Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers 554 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION Continued e Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to Tire Safety Information Tire and Loading In formation Placard in Starting and Operating for fur ther information Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended C
308. eral regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage To switch from odometer to trip odometers press and release the TRIP ODOMETER button To reset a trip odometer display the desired trip odom eter to be reset then push and hold the button for approximately two seconds until the display resets Vehicle Odometer Messages When the appropriate conditions exist the following messages will display in the odometer ECO 24 2660 btn ee rp Fuel Saver Indicator O ECO ON Fuel Saver Indicator On noEUSE esos sedet snp bcm atia Fuse Fault LOW GLE yas tay eek eS RR S Tire Pressure Low CHANgE OIL Oil Change Required ESCOEE e Electronic Stability Control O BASCAP cose era den lene at Gas Cap Loose HOTOIL
309. erating informa tion To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Display Fuel Saver If Equipped The Fuel Saver Mode message is located in the Compass Temperature display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Trailer Brake Type When this feature is selected the Trailer Brake Type can be changed between Light Electric and Heavy Elec tric To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Refer to Integrated Trailer Brake Module in Starting And Operating Calibrate Compass Refer to Compass Display for more information Compass Variance Refer to Compass Display for more information MEDIA CENTER 730N 430 430N RHR RER RBZ RHB CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate Refer to your Uconnect Multimedia RHR RER RBZ or RHB user s manual for detailed operating i
310. es engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements developed during ex tensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines Use MOPAR or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up ee STARTING AND OPERATING 539 CAUTION NOTE Use of the engine block heater if equipped is beneficial for E 85 startability when the ambient tempera ture is less than 32 F 0 C Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon liter than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your miles per gallon mpg miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation Replacement Parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance CAUTION D
311. evious screen When navigating a DVDs disc menu the operation depends on the disc s contents 17 4 In radio modes press to seek to the previous tunable station In disc modes press and hold to fast rewind through the current audio track or video chapter In menu modes use to navigate in the menu 18 ENTER Press to select the highlighted option in a menu 19 A NEXT In radio modes press to select to the next station In disc modes press to advance to the next audio track or video chapter In menu modes use to navigate in the menu Remote Control Storage The video screen s come with a built in storage compart ment for the remote control which is accessible when the screen is opened To remove the remote use your index finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you Do not try to pull the remote straight down as it will be very difficult to remove To return the remote back into its storage area insert one long edge of the remote into the two retaining clips first and then rotate the remote back up into the other two retaining clips until it snaps back into position VCR 05255 The Remote Control Storage Locking The Remote Control All remote control functionality can be disabled as a parental control feature e To disable the Remote Control from making any changes press the Video Lock button add follow the radio s instructions select menu rear ves lock If the UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
312. exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 500 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX Ibs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 k
313. ext channel e List Channel to hear a list of available channels e New Memo to record a new memo During the recording you may press the Voice Command 4 amp vr button to stop recording You proceed by saying one of e Menu Radio to switch to the radio menu the following commands e Select Name to say the name of a channel e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Save to save the memo 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Continue to continue recording Delete to delete the recording e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the Voice Command amp vr button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo Previous to play the previous memo Delete to delete a memo e Delete All to delete all memos Setup To switch to system setup you may say on of the following e Change to setup Switch to system setup Change to setup Main menu setup or e Switch to setup In this mode you may say the following commands Language English Language French Language Spanish Tutorial Voice Training NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice Command os button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 13
314. f the instrument panel lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control right brighter or left dimmer When the headlights are on you can supplement the brightness of the odometer trip odom eter radio and overhead console by rotating the control 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se to the right until you hear a click This feature is termed Cargo Light the Parade mode and is useful when headlights are The cargo lights are turned on by pressing on the cargo required during the day button 031464206 031464207 Dimmer Control Cargo Light Switch The cargo lights will also turn on for approximately 30 seconds when a RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed as part of the Illuminated Entry feature ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 Lights On Reminder If the headlights parking lights or cargo lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Battery Saver To protect the life of your vehicle s battery load shedding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated right for 10 minutes the interior lights will automatically turn off If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight minutes If the headlights are turned on and left on for eight minutes
315. f the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for further information For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped for further information 18 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission NOTE In vehicles with 4 7L or 5 7L engines the highest available transmission gear is displayed in the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC whenever the Electronic Range Select ERS fea ture is active Use the selector on the shift lever to activate ERS Refer to Automatic Transmission in Starting And Operating for further information 19 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped for further information 20 High Beam Indicator HD This indicator shows that headlights are on high beam Push the
316. ff mode the engine torque reduc tion and stability features are desensitized There fore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is reduced All Four Wheel Drive Vehicles In 4WD AUTO And 4WD LOCK Modes Can Also Choose The Following ESC Operating Mode This Is The Only ESC Operating Mode in 4WD LOW Full Off This mode is intended for off road use when ESC stabil ity features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions This mode is entered by pressing and holding the ESC Off switch for five seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running After five seconds the ESP Off Indicator Light will illuminate and the ESC Off message will appear in the odometer Press and release the trip odometer button located on the instrument cluster to clear this message NOTE The ESC OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed into the PARK position from any other position and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur even if the message was previously cleared In this mode ESC and TCS except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph 64 km h At 40 mph 64 km h the system returns to Partial Off mode described above When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph 56 km h the ESC system shuts off ESC is off at low vehicle speeds so that it w
317. ff manually using the on off switch The RamBox storage bins can be locked using the vehicle key To lock the storage bin insert the key into the keyhole on the pushbutton and turn clockwise to lock CAUTION e Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and latched before moving or driving vehicle Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227 CAUTION Continued RamBox Satety Warning Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal e Loads applied to the top of the bin lid should be injury or damage to your vehicle minimized to prevent damage to the lid and latching hinging mechanisms Damage to the RamBox bin may occur due to heavy sharp objects placed in bin that shift due to vehicle motion In order to minimize potential for damage secure all cargo to prevent movement and protect inside surfaces of bin from heavy sharp objects with appropriate padding Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs to allow water to drain from bins To remove plug pull up on the edge To install push plug downward into drain hole NOTE Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo dividers and shelf supports These accessories in addi tion to other RamBox accessories are available from MOPARe WARNING Always close the storage bin covers when your vehicle is unattended Do not allow children to have access to the storage bins Once in the storage bin young children may not be able to esca
318. ff Operation The power sunroof switch remain active for up to ap proximately 45 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 time is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS The auxiliary 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlets can provide power for in cab accessories designed for use with the standard cigar lighter plug The 12 Volt power outlets have a cap attached to the outlet indicating 12V DC together with either a key symbol or a battery symbol A key symbol indicates that the key must be in the ON RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to provide power The battery symbol indicates that the outlet is connected to the battery and can provide power at all times NOTE To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used CAUTION e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be
319. files including MP3 files es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Fre Specification quency kHz pit Rate kbps 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 48 451 92 312 ge 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 MPEG 2 Audio 112 96 80 64 Layer 3 24 22 05 16 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded
320. filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indicator or the message gASCAP will display in the odometer display area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose gas cap indicator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC for the premium cluster Refer to Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter EVIC If Equipped for further information es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL LoW tirE When the appropriate condition exists the odometer display will toggle between Lo and tirE for three cycles noFUSE If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Ignition Off Draw IOD fuse is improperly installed or damaged a noFUSE message will display in the odom eter display area For further information on fuses and fuse locations refer to Fuses in Maintaining Your Vehicle CHANgE OIL Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHANgE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means
321. forces of a collision best Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed adjust the seat 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and Continued THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch seat next to your arm in the rear seat Grasp the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap M Latch Plate To Buckle 022632830 Pulling Out Latch Plate And Webbing 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ss WARNING WARNING Continued e A belt buckled into the w
322. front wheel place the scissors jack under the rear portion of the lower control arm as shown below US 817e6cee 4X4 Jacking Location Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel wrench The tube extension may be used but is not 80ef9f80 required 4X2 Jacking Location ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 595 For 4x2 and 4x4 trucks when changing a rear wheel Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube Place the jack under the axle between the wheel and the shock bracket with the drive tubes extending to the rear Before raising the wheel off the ground make sure that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack position as required 060606563 Rear Jacking Location 596 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME e 2500 3500 Series Trucks Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel For 2500 3500 4x2 series trucks when changing a front wrench The tube extension may be used but is not wheel place the bottle jack under the frame rail behind required the wheel Locate the jack as far forward as possible on the straight part of the frame For 2500 3500 4x4 series trucks when changing the front wheel assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube Place the jack under the axle as close to the tire as possible with the drive tubes extendi
323. g E STARTING AND OPERATING 501 Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE occupants and cargo Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 Occupant 1 200 Ibs EXAMPLE 2 Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs 811a4d11 502 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting areas are affected by improper tire pressure in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures can cause steer
324. g in Starting and Operating for further information Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights 4WD 4LOW and 4WD AUTO are located on the instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection When you select a different transfer case posi tion the position indicator lights will do the following If All Shift Conditions Are Met 1 The current position indicator light will turn OFF 2 The selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift 3 When the shift is complete the indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON 424 STARTING AND OPERATING Se If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met 1 The indicator light for the current position will remain ON 2 The newly selected position indicator light will con tinue to flash 3 The transfer case will not shift NOTE Before retrying a selection make certain that all the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case position have been met To retry the selection turn the control knob back to the current position wait five seconds and retry selection To find the shift require ments refer to the Shifting Procedure for your transfer case located in this section of the owner s manual The SVC 4WD Warning Light monitors the electronic shift four wheel drive system If this light remains on after engine sta
325. g Warning Light 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE xe Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolster Driver Advanced Front Air Bag Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB if equipped Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC if equipped Front and Side Impact Sensors Seat Belt Buckle Switch Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors if equipped The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment This low output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 WARNING Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB If Equipped e No objects should be placed over or near the air Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB may bag on the instrument panel because any such bu dba provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant objects could cause harm if the vehicle 15 I1 a during a side impact The SAB is marked with an air bag M severe enough to cause the air bag to Jabe sewn into the outboard si
326. g any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 e In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the WARNING lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path e Improper installation can lead to failure of an opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate infant or child restraint It could come loose in a from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt collision The child could be badly injured or several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex the buckle with the release button facing out actly when installing an infant or child restraint When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the e If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the
327. gainst the windshield See your attached to the floor mat fasteners authorized dealer for service if your defroster is Never place or install floor mats or other floor inoperable coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and inter fering with the pedals or the ability to control the Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Al ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury Continued Continued en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 WARNING Continued e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting pos
328. h a third time to shut the heating elements OFF 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE e Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes e The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate When the HIGH level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH level If the HIGH level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LOW level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The LOW level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes Ventilated Seats If Equipped On some models both the driver and passenger seats are ventilated Located in the seat cushion and seatback are small fans that draw the air from the passenger compart ment and blow air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures The ventilated seat switches are located in the switch bank in the center stack of the instrument panel just below the climate controls The fans operate at two speeds HIGH and LOW Press the switch once to choose HIGH press it a second time to choose LOW Pressing the switch a third time will turn the ventilated seat OFF
329. h gear and overdrive fifth and sixth gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driv ing characteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the Electronic Range Select ERS feature refer to Electronic Range Select ERS in this section to select a lower gear range Under these conditions using a lower gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup If the transmission operating temperature exceeds normal operating limits the powertrain controller will modify the transmission shift schedule and expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating If the transmission becomes extremely hot the Trans mission Temperature Warning Light may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmission cools down NOTE Use caution when operating a heavily loaded vehicle at low speeds such as towing a trailer up a steep grade or in stop and go traffic during hot weather In these conditions torque converter slip can impose a significant additional heat load on the cooling system Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possible gear when climbing a grade or shift
330. han 25 mph Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage right side of the steering wheel to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate gms FS T Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system M su MARISE off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING 1 ON OFF 2 RES Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally 4 CANCEL 3 SET NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec set the system or cause it to go faster than you want tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut You could lose control and have an accident Always down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at leave the system OFF when you are not using it the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Elect
331. he EVIC displays CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Programming A Non Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button you want to program and the hand held transmit ter button 4 Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHAN NEL TRAINED then release both buttons NOTE e It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cased for the channel to train e If the EVIC displays DID NOT TRAIN repeat from Step 2 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se 5 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button The EVIC will display CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the EVIC displ
332. he Uconnect Phone Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previously downloaded phonebook is avail able for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible e Only the mobile phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE e Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited e Press the amp button to begin 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit Entry You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or other that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number yo
333. he bar must be aligned This alignment may require that the vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side to side To return to the On Road mode press the bottom of the stabilizer sway bar button ee STARTING AND OPERATING 433 WARNING If the stabilizer sway bar will not return to On Road mode vehicle stability is greatly reduced Do not attempt to drive the vehicle over 18 mph 29 km h Driving faster than 18 mph 29 km h may cause loss of control of the vehicle which could result in serious injury Contact your local service center for assistance SAFE OFF ROAD DRIVING POWER WAGON ONLY Off Road Driving Tips And Vehicle Characteristics Your vehicle has excellent on and off road capabilities These off road capabilities will allow you to explore those wilderness trails where few travel providing a source of exciting and satisfying recreation Before you venture out you should contact your local governmental agency to determine the designated off road vehicle ORV trails or recreation areas You should always tread lightly and only use established roads trails or ORV recreational areas The National Forest Service Bureau of Land Management or local Department of Natural Re sources are a wealth of information and usually have maps with marked trails Skid Plates And Underbody Protection Steel skid plates protect the major driveline components of the truck including the fuel tank transfer case and
334. he ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided
335. he seats independently The 5 8 operate ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 The heated seats switch from HIGH to LOW and from LOW to OFF automatically based on time and tempera ture of the seat The heated seats can operate on HIGH heat for a maximum of 60 minutes before switching to LOW heat Once a seat has switched to the LOW heat setting it may operate for a maximum of 45 minutes before automatically shutting OFF The heated seats can shut OFF early or may not turn on when the seat is already warm Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s heated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Rear Heated Seats On some models the two outboard seats are equipped with heated seats The heated seat switches for these seats are located on the rear of the center console There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HIGH 3 Jevel heating Press the switch a sec ond time to select LOW level heating Press the switc
336. he transmission into PARK es STARTING AND OPERATING 577 CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in NEUTRAL and the engine running With the transfer case in NEUTRAL ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into PARK 15 Remove the key fob from the ignition switch 16 Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable tow bar 17 Release the parking brake NOTE e The transfer case cannot be shifted into NEUTRAL from the 4WD AUTO if equipped position e Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed If any of these requirements are not met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button or are no longer met during the shift the NEUTRAL indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL button is released The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON RUN position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing A flashing NEUTRAL indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met 578 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL Electronic Shift Transfer Case If Equipped Use the foll
337. hen towing How 3 Right Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range select 4 Electric Brakes TOW HAUL mode if equipped or select a lower gear using the Electronic Range Select ERS feature ee STARTING AND OPERATING 565 NOTE Using TOW HAUL mode or a lower gear range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend trans mission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you regularly tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to Mainte nance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing Tow Haul To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat ing turn the TOW HAUL feature ON when driving in hilly areas or select a lower gear range using the Electronic Range Select ERS feature on more severe grades Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System To reduce potential for engine
338. her occu pants to fasten their seat belts If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac tivating BeltAlert NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenger if equipped with BeltAlert9 seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts throughout their pregnancies Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when full
339. hicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 605 WARNING Preparations For Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the engine compartment behind the left headlight assembly e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or NOTE The positive battery post is covered with a protective cap Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive battery post bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is fl
340. hift lever has only Park Reverse Neutral and Drive shift positions Manual downshifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control refer to Electronic Range Select ERS in this section Pressing the ERS switches column shift or moving the shift lever to the left or right console shift while in the DRIVE position will select the highest available transmission gear and will display that gear in the instrument cluster as 6 5 4 3 2 1 Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precau tion turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade 392 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING WARNING Continued e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for e tis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK the parking brake
341. his display and scroll through the language choices Press the SELECT button to select English Spanish Espa ol French Fran ais Italian Italiano German Deutsch and Dutch Neder lands Then as you continue the information will dis play in the selected language Nav Turn By Turn When this feature is selected the navigation system utilizes voice commands guiding through the drive route mile by mile turn by turn until the final destina tion is reached To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Park Assist System The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only Sound and Display or turned OFF through the EVIC To make your selection scroll up or down until the pre ferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Refer to Rear Park Assist System in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for system function and oper ating information 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Auto Unlock Doors When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the v
342. his flammable and can explode injuring you Other time unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil or Refrigerants ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633 Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency EPA and is an ozone saving product However the manufacturer recommends that air condi tioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Front Driveshaft Lubrication 2500 3500 Four Wheel Drive Models Ram Trucks Only Lubricate the front driveshaft grease fitting at each oil change Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Use MO
343. his range Set the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recre ational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 395 DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first and sec ond gears direct third gear and overdrive fourth and fifth gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driv ing characteristics under all normal operating conditions To access all six available gears you must use the Electronic Range Select ERS feature described below When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the Electronic Range Select ERS feature refer to Electronic Range Select ER
344. hrough a window to avoid pinching the cord in the door Always disconnect the remote control when not in use 10 Put wire rope under tension Using the remote con trol switch slowly wind the wire rope until no slack remains Once the wire rope is under tension stand well clear of it and never step over it STARTING AND OPERATING 469 12 Check wire rope The wire rope should be neatly wound around the spooling drum Improper winding can cause damage to the wire rope 11 Check your anchor Make sure all connections are secured and free of debris before continuing with the winching procedure 470 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 13 In certain situations you may decide to throw a heavy blanket or similar object over the wire rope A heavy blan ket can absorb energy should the wire rope break Place it on the wire rope midway be tween the winch and the an chor point Do this before the wire rope is put under ten sion Do not approach or move the blanket once tension is applied Do not allow it to get pulled into the fairlead If itis necessary to move or remove the blanket slack the tension on the wire rope first 8149d108 14 Establish no people zones Make your intentions clear Be sure that everyone in the immediate vicinity surrounding the winching operation is completely aware of your intentions before you pull Declare where the spectators should not stand never behind or in front of the vehicle and
345. iable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended If Engine Fails To Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting procedure it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 377 WARNING Continued e If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergen cies for further information If the engine has been
346. ic Alarm is on the headlights will turn on the park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE e The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on e You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils
347. ic grid lines will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone Zones Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 0 1 ft 0 30 cm Yellow 1 ft 3 ft 30 cm 1 m Green 3 ft or greater 1 m or greater 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Always check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob structions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death CAUTION e To avoid vehicle damage Park View should only be used as a parking aid The Park View camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path Continued CAUTION Continued e To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom mended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when using ParkView NOTE If snow ice mud or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens Turning ParkView O
348. ic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn ON the ignition switch 2 Press the UP or DOWN button until the System Setup Customer Programmable Features menu is reached then press the SELECT button 3 Press the DOWN button until Calibrate Compass is displayed in the EVIC then press and release the SELECT button 4 Press and release the SELECT button to start the calibration The CAL indicator will be displayed in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading For the most accurate compass performance the compass must be set using the following steps 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Sx NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of 2 Press the UP or DOWN button until the System Setup the ins
349. ication Number TIN 496 Tite Markings 21 60 03 3 dian Pea e do ERR 492 Tire Safety Information 0 492 TICES 2a ckaeedo ee pack ed Paene hae pw epa 89 502 705 Aging Life of Tires 0 509 Air Pressures ciega uubutex X4 qm RE 502 Chains 4 uera ace pb Mora ep Oa Re 512 Compact Spare sepes rigest irunia paai 506 Du l 226984 RSEEY ior ENES 516 601 General Information llus 502 High Speed ues eec e pes dese as 505 Inflation Pressures llle 503 Life of Tires i dead ee ea Estrik 509 Load Capacity c ebeereeteu sna cem 498 499 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 517 Pressure Warning Light 262 Quality Grading 25r ete ce ias 705 Radial s seomra ute Ia REPE IU E ES 505 Replacement 4i 2e449 eg ee dg aties 510 ROtatiOn eed araea eea OUR RR NU Ud Ea 515 Safety c tere duda ed be debe dt 492 502 JS CPP uc PCM 494 Snow Wires sae metanga e3400 54 234 44 514 SPINNING eed Kees eee weted Celene 508 Tread Wear Indicators 0 509 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 553 Torque Converter Clutch 390 400 410 Tow Hooks Emergency 00000 609 TOWING ee a eae mic GS eee Pele mid 544 612 24 Hour Towing Assistance 118 Disabled Vehicle sss 612 Guid e serier aco eb hr eg rab 549 Recreational cee ee eae 570 Weight idee et gebe eU PSS eee le S 549 Towing Assistan
350. icle Information Center EVIC If Equipped for further information 25 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided l should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 Your
351. icle Limited Warranty WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 478 STARTING AND OPERATING MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM MDS IF EQUIPPED 5 7L ENGINE ONLY This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required NOTE The MDS system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake pull the parking brake release handle 054105820 Parking Brake Release When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON the Brake Warning Light in the instrumen
352. icles require different tire pressure Hard surfaces like rock and heavier vehicles require higher pressures than softer surfaces such as sand and lighter vehicles You will ee STARTING AND OPERATING 445 need to experiment to determine what is right for your situation It is easier and faster to let air out than it is to replace it so start high and lower it as required Remem ber you must return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on road or at highway conditions Be sure you have a way to return the tires to their normal on road air pressure CAUTION Reduced tire pressure increases the risk of tire dam age and may cause tire unseating with total loss of air pressure To reduce the risk of tire unseating while at a reduced tire pressure drive at slower speeds and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers Vehicle Recovery If you drive off road you may encounter a situation where you will need to recover your vehicle Vehicle recovery should always be given consideration before attempting a questionable obstacle You should never go off road driving without the ability to recover your vehicle from a situation Having another vehicle with you usually works best for most situations The first thing to do is assess the situation Why are you stuck Are you hung up on something Would it be easier to go forward or to go backward Can you still move the vehicle Is there an anchor point to winch to Are you alone or do
353. icles with manual transmission the parking brake must be engaged e Touching the screen on a Touch Screen radio while a DVD is playing brings up basic remote control func tions for DVD play such as scene selection Play Pause FF RW and Stop Pressing the X in the upper comer will turn off the remote control screen functions 1 Video In Yellow 2 Left Audio In White 3 Right Audio In Red es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 When connecting an external source to the AUX input be sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES jacks NOTE Certain high end video games such as Playsta tion3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of the vehicle s Power Inverter Refer to the Power Inverter section in your vehicle s Owner s Manual for more information Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 1 Using The Remote Control 1 Press the MODE button on the Remote Control 2 While looking at the video screen highlight VES AUX 1 by either pressing Up Down Left Right buttons or by repeatedly pressing the MODE button then press ENTER on the Remote Control L1 Select Mode DISC AUX Ves DISC Ves AUXI F Enter to Select FASAT s WEATHER 4 MUTE Preset 10 tees DIRECT TUNE M The Weather Channel ihe Weather Channel a Mother Nature Select VES AUX1 Mode On The VES Screen 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Using The Touch Screen
354. idation road dirt heavy duty hauling and hard water stains Weathering and UV exposure will lead to fading dulling and loss of gloss over time ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 657 To help maintain the appearance of your Spray On Bedliner the manufacturer recommends you periodically rinse all loose dirt from your truck bed and clean your truck at least twice per year using the MOPAR Spray On Bedliner Conditioner available at your local authorized dealer To Help Maintain The Appearance Of Your Spray On Bedliner Follow The Steps Below 1 Rinse your truck bed out with water to remove any loose dirt and debris 2 Mix a mild soap or detergent with water with a soft cloth or brush 3 Rinse bedliner with water 4 Once dry apply a small amount of MOPAR Spray On Bedliner Conditioner to a moist towel or sponge and wipe over the entire surface of the truck bedliner WARNING Do not use silicon based protection products to clean your bedliner Silicon based products can become slippery and may result in personal injury Spray On Bedliners are chemically resistant to many different types of chemicals including gasoline oil hydraulic fluids for short periods of time If a spill yj occurs on your Spray On Bedliner rinse the truck out as soon as possible to avoid permanent damage 658 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Repairing The Spray On Bedliner While extremely tough it is possible to damage a Spray On Bedliner
355. iece assembly with a flat face Lightly tighten the wheel nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not fully tighten the wheel nuts until the vehicle has been lowered 6 Using the wheel wrench finish tightening the wheel nuts using a crisscross pattern The correct wheel nut tightness is 130 ft lbs 177 N m torque 1500 Series 135 ft Ibs 183 N m torque for 2500 3500 single rear wheel SRW models and 145 ft Ibs 197 N m for 3500 dual rear wheel models If in doubt about the correct tight ness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 599 WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle Al ways stow the jack parts and the extra tire and wheel in the places provided 7 Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel blocks Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center caps on the spare wheel This may result in cap damage 8 Lower the jack to its fully closed position If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial thumbwheel by hand it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in order to lower the jack Stow the replaced tire jack and tools as previously described 9 Adjust the tire pressure when possible NOTE Do not oil wheel studs For chrome wheels do not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts Hub Caps Wheel Covers If Equ
356. ield Windshield washer solution used with water as directed on the container aids cleaning action reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging and is not harmful to paint or trim Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required 636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING CAUTION e The catalytic converter requires the use of un e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
357. ift Lever 388 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing an accident or personal injury Screen Display 2 3 4 D Actual Gear s 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 4 Allowed Console Shift Lever NOTE To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration engine braking tap the shift lever to the left console shift or the ERS switch down column To exit ERS mode simply press and hold the shift lever to shift repeatedly as the vehicle slows The transmission the right console shift or the ERS switch column will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be shift until D is once again displayed in the shift lever slowed down position indicator in the instrument cluster ee STARTING AND OPERATING 389 Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically the potential for transmission overheating or failure due controlled Overdrive fourth gear The transmission will automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if the follow ing conditions are present the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem perature the engine coolant antifreeze has reached an ad equate temperature vehicle speed is sufficiently high and the TOW HAUL switch has not been a
358. ile the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision Front Head Restraints To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the adjust ment button located on the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint Adjustment Button ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 Rear Head Restraints The two outboard seat are equipped with adjustable head restraints To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the adjustment button located on the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint Adjustment Button NOTE e The rear center head restraint Crew Cab and Quad Cab has only one adjustment position that is used to aid in the routing of a tether Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 3 e The head restraints should only be removed by quali fied technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED The memory seat buttons are located on the outboard side of the drivers seat cushion 031105757 Memory Seat Buttons The memory b
359. ilgate 1 Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear camera if 036906362 equipped refer to Disconnecting the Rear Camera If Locking Tab Equipped in this section 3 Disconnect the chassis wiring harness ensuring the 2 Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support cables by connector bracket does not fall into the sill releasing the lock tang from the pivot 4 Connect the chassis plug and bracket provided in the glove box to the chassis wiring harness and insert the bracket back into the sill 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Make sure tailgate is supported when removing 5 Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free the left side support cables pivot 6 Remove the tailgate from the vehicle NOTE Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck pickup box WARNING To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide which is deadly the exhaust system on vehicles equipped with Cap or Slide In Campers should extend beyond the overhanging camper compartment and be free of leaks 036905824 Locking Tang Locking Tail 3 Raise the tailgate to a 45 degree angle ecking Targat The lock is located next to the tailgate handle The 4 Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right side tailgate can be locked using the vehicle key pivot clears the hanger bracket UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS E Instrument Panel Features
360. ill not interfere with off road driving but ESC function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph 64 km h The ESC Off Indicator Light will always be illuminated 490 STARTING AND OPERATING ME when ESC is off To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation ESC Off is the only operating mode for ESC in 4WD LOW Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD LOCK or NEUTRAL to 4WD LOW the ESC system will be in this mode WARNING With the ESC switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable In an emer gency evasive maneuver the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability ESC Off mode is intended for off highway or off road use only ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your auth
361. ill switch modes to Radio CD or other valid audio source The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next pre set station that you have programmed in the radio pre set pushbuttons CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch changes CDs on the 6 Disc in dash CD changer radio This button does not function for all other radios CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from cente
362. imum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compartment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information NOTE Vehicles equipped with a 5 7L engine must use SAE 5W 20 oil Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Multi Displacement System MDS Re fer to Multi Displacement System in Starting and Operating for further information ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629 Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used NOTE For 2500 3500 trucks with a
363. ing into Overdrive when cold This is normal Using the Electronic Range Select ERS feature when the transmission is sufficiently warm will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive Six Speed Automatic Transmission 4 7L And 5 7L Engine 1500 Models Only The shift lever position display located in the instrument panel cluster indicates the transmission gear range The shift lever is mounted either on the right side of the steering column if equipped or on the console if equipped You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of the PARK position refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position Pull the shift lever toward you when shifting into REVERSE or PARK or when shifting out of PARK column shift only ee STARTING AND OPERATING 391 The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears The transmission s
364. ing lights and instrument panel lights rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the parking light symbol To turn off the parking lights rotate the headlight switch back to the O Off position Fog Lights If Equipped The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight switch to the parking light or headlight position and pushing in the headlight rotary control ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 031464205 Fog Light Switch The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on The fog lights will turn off when the switch is pushed a second time when the headlight switch is rotated to the off position or the high beam is selected Interior Lights Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened when the dimmer control rotating wheel on the bottom of the switch is rotated to the far right detent position or if equipped when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter When a door is open and the interior lights are on rotating the dimmer control all the way left to the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to go out This is also known as the Party mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle s battery The brightness o
365. ing prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 503 WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition Refer to Supple mental Tire Pressure Information in Starting and Op erating for further information The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflat
366. ing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing mi 819793fc STARTING AND OPERATING 523 Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recom mended cold placard pressure inflation value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information 524 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Service TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received 81979401 If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the TPM Telltale Light will no longer flash and the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal in
367. ing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Flash Lamps With Lock When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Headlamps With Wipers When this feature is selected and the HEADLIGHT switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed sh
368. ing to NEUTRAL when stopped in heavy traffic can help to reduce this excess heat generation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 407 During cold temperatures transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed This feature im proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency Engagement of both the torque converter clutch and the top overdrive gear are inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch in this section During extremely cold temperatures 16 F 27 C or below operation may briefly be limited to first and direct gears only Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam aging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps Stop the vehicle Shift the transmission into
369. intervals Waiting a few seconds between such intervals will protect the starter from overheating WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in the vehicle A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Normal Starting Normal starting of either a warm or cold engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Turn the key fob to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the key fob to the OFF position wait five seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Automatic Transmission Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or PARK position Apply the brake before shifting into any driving range NOTE This vehicle is equipped with a transmission shift interlocking system The brake pedal must be pressed to shift out of PARK 376 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tip Start Feature Do not press the accelerator Turn the ignition switch briefly to the START position and release it The starter motor will continue to run but will automatically disen gage when the engine is running Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F or 29 C To ensure rel
370. io Mode 298 Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play 0 304 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 306 List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 308 Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 308 Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped z isse ee ee ee ep 309 Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone f Equipped oe RR 313 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 iPod USB MP3 Control If Equipped Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device is gee dk a xk ep seeker oe Using This Feature aer che RE kes Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA ll Uconnect Multimedia Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Getting Started 00 0 Single Video Screen 0 0000 Play Video Games 0004 313 Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A Video Is Playing On Channel 1 327 Important Notes For Single Video Screen System sis as eae eas hia os a 329 Play A DVD Using The Touch Screen Radio Remote Control Remote Control Storage llus 334 Locking The Remote Control 335 Replacing The Batteries 335 Headphones Operation
371. io will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Bjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file
372. ion Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated 504 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation Do not reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low ee STARTING AN
373. ions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Follow the instruc tions below See your authorized dealer for help if necessary 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Install the child restraint and remove the slack in the Multiple Child Restraint Installation Sequence tether ar according to the manufacturer s instructions Quad Cab Crew Cab Mega Cab Rear Seats gt lt Mega Cab 1 Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat 2 Lift the cover and attach the hook to the square opening in the sheet metal Regular Cab Tether Strap Mounting 1 Tether Strap Hook 2 Tether Strap to Child Restraint 3 Tether Anchor THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 behind each seating position You can gain access to the center seating position tether strap loop by raising the head restraint and reaching between the rear glass and rear seat Mega Cab Tether Strap Mounting 3 Install the child restraint and remove the slack in the tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions Quad Cab Crew Cab Head Restraint Adjustment 1 The tether straps loops are located between the rear glass and the rear seat There is a tether strap loop located 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
374. ior to pressing the NEUTRAL button or are no longer met during the shift the NEUTRAL indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL button is released position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON RUN position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing A flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS ll Hazard Warning Flashers 583 To Stow The Flat Or Spare 603 B if Your Engine Overheats 559 Milloi ng i229 rr ERE Re H Jacking And Tire Changing 584 W jJump Starting Procedures Jack Location 4 ssepe mere See apaa 585 Preparations For Jump Start Removing The Spare Tire 590 Jump Starting Procedure Preparations va ince gaa em eve 591 W Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 608 Instructions neds dace RR were 592 W Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped 609 Hub Caps Wheel Covers If Equipped 599 MB Shift Lever Override 0 610 Wheel Nuts e 83 06 oe Wa el Sate E dew 600 Column Shifter If Equipped 610 582 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE Center Console Shifter If Equipped
375. ipped The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle off the ground For 2500 3500 single rear wheel SRW models use the blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry the hub cap off Insert the blade end into the pry off notch and carefully pop off the hub cap with a back and forth motion On 3500 models with dual rear wheels DRW you must first remove the hub caps The jack handle driver has a hook at one end that will fit in the pry off notch of the rear hub caps Position the hook and pull out on the ratchet firmly The hub cap should pop off The wheel skins can now be removed For the front hub cap on 3500 models use the blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry the caps off The wheel skin can now be removed 600 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE CAUTION e Use a back and forth motion to remove the hub cap Do not use a twisting motion when removing the hub cap damage to the hub cap finish may occur The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has two pry off notches Make sure that the hook of the jack handle driver is located squarely in the cap notch before attempting to pull off You must use the flat end of the lug wrench to pry off the wheel skins Insert the flat tip completely and using a back and forth motion loosen the wheel skin Repeat this procedure around the tire until the skin pops off Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet When replacing the hub caps tilt the cap retainer over the lug
376. ipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light 030407085 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when CAUTION the dimming feature is activated The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never NOTE This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in a passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Some vehicles will not have a convex right side mirror 030405626 Outside Mirrors Folding Feature Folding Mirror All outside mirrors are designed to be able to
377. is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pres sure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure Pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures 498 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL SE oT REARS on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the THE COMBINED WEIGHT GF OCCUPANTS REO SHOULD driver s side door NEVER EXCEED XXX KG TIRE ORIGINAL TIR COLD TIF INFLATION PRE P195 70R14 T125 70D15 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI 200kPa 29PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AR 4N109268 E 811b5a9a Tire and L
378. is light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the seat belt reminder light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 32 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped for further information 33 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped R This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con ee trol
379. ist of all tools and equipment IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M e Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com es F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 705 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in
380. itch any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 Open Sunroof Express Mode Press the switch rearward and release it and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction is detected the sunroof will automatically re tract Remove the obstruction if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close NOTE If three consecutive sunroof close attempts re sult in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled Pinch Protect Override
381. item then press the remote control s navigation buttons P lt to change the value for the currently selected item To reset all values back to the original settings select the Default Settings menu option and press the remote control s ENTER button Disc Features control the remote DVD player s if equipped settings of DVD being watched in the remote player 344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the screen closed e Set the audio to the desired source and channel e Close the video screen e To change the current audio mode press the remote control s MODE button This will automatically select the next available audio mode without using the Mode Select menu e When the screen is reopened the video screen will automatically turn back on and show the appropriate display menu or media If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard verify that the headphones are turned on the ON indicator is illuminated and the headphone selector switch is on the desired channel If the headphones are turned on press the remote control s power button to turn audio on If audio is still not heard check that fully charged batteries are installed in the headphones Disc Formats The VES DVD player is capable of playing the follow ing types of discs 12 mm or 8 mm diameter e DVD Video discs MPEG 2 video compression
382. ith Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features System Setup in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans mitter for at least four seconds but no longer than ten seconds Then press the PANIC button while still hold ing the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm System Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Pan
383. ittent Wipers Differential Limited Slip Dipsticks Power Steering Disabled Vehicle Towing Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant Door Locks Door Locks Automatic Door Opener Garage Driving Off Pavement Off Road Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy 220 170 712 INDEX ee Dual Rear Wheels lessen 516 601 E 8b Fuel i22226kik eaa oe i karkani Y de 536 Electric Rear Window Defrost 220 Electrical Power Outlets 0 00 203 Electronic Brake Control System 481 Anti Lock Brake System 481 Brake Assist System 00004 482 Electronic Stability Program 486 Traction Control System 481 Electronic Range Select ERS 387 397 408 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 174 Electronic Stability Program ESP 486 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 187 Electronically Shifted Transfer Case 415 422 Emergency Brake 0 6 0000 e eens 478 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 608 Hazard Warning Flasher 583 Jump Starting 44 124 wale dane rs 604 Overheating ke opas beet euh en 583 TOW HOOKS 2 i2 a 4e e Eu IUe 609 Emission Control System Maintenance 624 Engine 4 29 per RES ER ae ES Y e 620 621 622 Air Cleaner llle 630 Block Heater 0 000 ee e
384. iving conditions Heat PSI displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to 6 psi This will display the Tire Pressure Monitor System 14 to 41 kPa during normal driving conditions Refer shows the current pressure of all four road tires For to Tires General Information Tire Inflation Pres additional information refer to Tire Pressure Monitor sures in Starting And Operating for additional System in Starting And Operating information NE 83 F e Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI m pA kPa or BAR FM 101 9 Units Tire Pressure Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Units 28 R 29 displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button The 29 amp 30 EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of mea 56789 mi sure To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to 045009835 the setting showing that the setting has been selected Tire Pressure Display 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Compass Temperature Display The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing The EVIC will display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature NOTE e The system will display the last known outside tem perature when starting the vehicle an
385. justed before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt 030905747 Recline Handle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 To adjust the seatback lift upward on the handle lean back on the seatback and when you reach the desired position release the handle To return the seatback lift upward on the handle lean forward and release the handle at the desired position WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death Dump Feature Manual Recline Seat Only Actuating the recliner handle will allow the seatback to swing dump forward on manual recliner seats This dump feature allows access to the storage bin behind the seat WARNING e Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while actuating the handle The seatback may swing forward and hit you causing injury e To avoid injury place your hand on the seatback and actuate the handle then position the seatback in the desired position 40 20 40 Front Bench Seat If Equipped The seat is divided into three segments The outboard seat portions are each 40 of the total width of the seat On some models the back of the center portion 20 easily folds down to provide an armrest center storage
386. ks equipped with LT245 70R17 or LT265 70R17 tires e On 4x4 2500 model trucks the use of class U snow chains is permitted on the rear wheels only of trucks equipped with LT245 70R17 LT265 70R17 or LT285 70R17 tires On 4x2 and 4x4 3500 SRW Single Rear Wheel model trucks the use of class U snow chains is permitted on the rear wheels only of trucks equipped with LT265 70R17 tires On 4x2 and 4x4 3500 DRW Dual Rear Wheel model trucks the use of class U snow chains is permitted on the front and rear wheels of trucks equipped with LT235 80R17 tires 514 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Do not use tire chains on the front wheels of any model except for 3500 DRW Dual Rear Wheel trucks equipped with LT235 80R17 tires There may not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle Do not use tire chains on the rear wheels of 1500 model trucks equipped with LT275 70R17 P275 60R20 or 285 45R22 tires There may not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter All season tires can be identified by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
387. l knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio device or external USB device e Turning it clockwise forward and counterclock wise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once the track to be played is highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M fast will scroll through the list faster During fast scroll a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display may be noticeable During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if the track is at the bottom of the list just turn the wheel backward counterclockwise to get to the track faster In List mode the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod or external USB device e Preset 1 Playlists e Preset 2 Artists e Preset 3 Albums e Preset 4 Genres e Preset 5 Audiobooks e Preset 6 Podcasts Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line To exit List mode without selecting a track press the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode LIST button The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod or external USB device Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top menu item to be
388. lay replace if necessary mi mi O OC O O C O Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 685 40 000 Miles 65 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 40 000 miles 65 000 km M Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 48 000 Miles 78 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 48 000 miles 78 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the L engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the top row of spark plugs 4 7L Engine Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for Oocoucu damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police
389. lay the Rear VES Controls If a channel list appears on the right side of the screen touch the HIDE LIST soft key to display the Rear VES Controls screen DVD Video Menu Em Display Setting FER My Files Screen Fee Screer SETTE ES Default View g gs Sirius Traffic System Setup Rear VES Picture View Map WAF View Audio Control Rear VES Soft key 3 Touch the 1 soft key and then the DISC soft key in the MEDIA column To exit touch the back arrow soft key at the top left of the screen NOTE The 1 and 2 soft keys are displayed for the headphone channels Touch 1 or 2 based on which channel you want to change select the new mode from the available list on the right Modes that are unavailable are greyed out UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 Rear VES Controls 12 00 amp LOCK LIST Select Channel Screen 1 And DISC In The MEDIA Column NOTE e To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO MEDIA hard key on the radio faceplate then touch the DISC tab soft key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft key 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e Viewing a DVD on the Touch Screen radio screen is Play Video Games not available in all states provinces and the vehicle Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA must be stopped and the shift lever must be in the input jacks located on the back of the center console PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmis sion In veh
390. le The bumper face bar will be damaged ee STARTING AND OPERATING 573 ee Transfer Case If Equipped Suen Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that recreational towing the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL N before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal WARNING parts You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL N position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL N Bring the vehicle to a complete stop Turn OFF the engine Press and hold the brake pedal Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL jl 2 position disengages both the front and rear drive 9 4 5 Shift the transfer case lever into NEUTRAL N 6 7 8 shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move even if the transmission is in PARK The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle Start the engine Shift the transmission into REVERSE Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement 574 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 with transmission in DRIVE 10 Turn OFF the engine 11 Firmly apply the parking brake 12 Shift the transmission into PARK CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans mission is shifted into PARK with the
391. le Use only recommended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Trans mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS H Maintenance Schedule 680 Required Maintenance Intervals 682 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N it E S C H E D U L E S 8 680 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Ses MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indica
392. le there is a high risk of environmen tal or vehicle damage or where nothing else seems to work A winch can deliver a high pulling force with a great deal of control It allows you to walk the vehicle out of the situation in a slow controlled manner This control works well for avoiding further vehicle dam age Once you decide it is time to use the winch look for a good anchor point It needs to be strong enough to hold more than the vehicle s weight and provide a direction of pull as straight as possible Use block and tackle if necessary to improve the angle of pull or increase the winch s pulling force If the anchor point is a tree use a strap around its base and hook the cable 448 STARTING AND OPERATING ME to the strap If it is another vehicle then place that vehicle in PARK and block the front tires If you cannot find an anchor point within reach try using your spare tire by burying it Once you have determined an anchor point hook up the cable ensuring there are a least five wraps of cable left on the drum and place a floor mat or something else over the strung out cable Placing something over the strung out cable helps keep the cable on the ground if it breaks Next place the vehicle in first gear and apply a very light throttle as you power the winch in Be careful not to allow slack in the cable as you recover the vehicle Do not try to guide the cable into the drum If it starts to bunch up on one end let it You can re s
393. lectronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 24 Oil Pressure Warning Light E This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Veh
394. life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale ee STARTING AND OPERATING 545 Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR
395. ling with tow hooks Tow straps may become disengaged caus ing serious injury explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed CAUTION EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for hooks tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle NOTE For off road recovery it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle 610 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use one of the following procedures to temporarily move the shift lever Column Shifter If Equipped 1 Firmly set the parking brake 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position without starting the engine 3 Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 5 Using a screwdriver or similar tool press and hold the override tab through the access port ringed circle on the bottom of the steering column Shift Lever Override Access Port 6 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position
396. llow the winch motor to cool for a few minutes before continuing to winch The winch will resume normal function once the motor cools 458 STARTING AND OPERATING a Understanding The Features Of Your Winch 814a6beb Winch Components ee STARTING AND OPERATING 459 1 Motor The winch motor is powered by the vehicle charging system and features a thermal protection switch that automatically stops motor function in the power in direction if the motor gets too hot 2 Remote Socket The remote socket allows the remote control to be attached to the control pack to allow the winch to function 3 Winch Drum With Integral Brake The winch drum allows the wire rope to be stored on the winch and transmits force to the wire rope The winch is equipped with an integral brake that will stop rotation of the winch drum if the winch motor is stopped 4 3 Stage Planetary Gear Set Provides balance between speed and pulling power 5 Wire Rope The wire rope allows the winch to be connected to an anchor to provide a pulling force 6 Clutch Lever The clutch lever allows the winch drum to be disconnected from the winch motor to allow the wire rope to be pulled from the winch by hand 7 Remote Control The remote control provides the interface between the winch operator and the winch The remote control provides the ability to power the winch in out and stop the winch To operate the winch the toggle switch is pressed down to power the
397. low the manufacturer s directions ex seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held actly when installing an infant or child restraint in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt A rearward facing child restraint should only be NOTE For additional information refer to used in a rear seat m www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana A rearward facing infant restraint in the front seat dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web may be struck by a deploying a passenger air bag site for additional information http www tc gc ca which may cause severe or fatal injury to the roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm infant 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt restraint comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat Make sure that the child is upright in the seat The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child e Before buyin
398. lowing beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every Uconnect Phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and is usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may Towing Assistance not be applicable with the available mobile service and If you need towing assistance arca e Press the amp button to begin If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this
399. mance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emission control system Continued CAUTION Continued e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers are not recommended Most of these products contain high concentra tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer ee STARTING AND OPERATING 535 NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control WARNING Continued systems can result in civil penalties being assessed z against you e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainten
400. may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake Fluid Level Check The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked when performing under the hood service or immediately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system failure The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic reservoir On the outboard side of the reservoir there is a MAX dot and an MIN dot The fluid level must be kept within these two dots Do not add fluid above the MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap E MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 645 With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as WARNING the brake linings wear However an unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake should be conducted fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further
401. me are just too steep to climb and should not be attempted You should always feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities You should always climb hills straight up and down Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle 440 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Before Climbing A Steep Hill As you approach a hill consider its grade or steepness Determine if it is too steep Look to see what the traction is on the hill side trail Is the trail straight up and down What is on top and the other side Are there ruts rocks branches or other obstacles on the path Can you safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong If everything looks good and you feel confident then change trans mission into a lower gear shift the transfer case into 4L Low and proceed with caution You should use first gear and 4L Low Range for very steep hills Driving Up Hill Once you have determined your ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropri ate gear line your vehicle up for the straightest possible run Accelerate with an easy constant throttle and apply more power as you start up the hill Do not race forward into a steep grade the abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control If the front end begins to bounce ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground As you approach the crest of the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the top If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest
402. minate the trailer sway 546 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the truck These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturer s directions it pro vides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with GAWR requirements WARNING e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability and braking performance and could result in a collision Weight distributing systems may not be compat ible with surge brake couplers Consult with your hitch
403. mission reaches 180 F 82 C Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature CAUTION Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading 7 Check for leaks Release parking brake To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 651 dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube Automatic Transmission Fluid And Filter Change Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE If the transmission is disassembled for any reason the fluid and filter s should be changed It is important that proper lubricant is used in the transmission Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle O
404. mum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h N Neutral This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information e If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift The position indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected posi tion indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met To retry a shift return the control knob back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again e If all the requirements to select a new transfer case position have been met the current position indicator light will turn OFF the selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift When the shift is complete the position indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON 420 STARTING AND OPERATING xe 2WDs 4WD LOCK Rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the a
405. n Place Retrieve A Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the amp s button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the be button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the Se button until you hear a single beep indicat ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the amp e button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the ve button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the amp s button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the amp button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is
406. n Or Off With Navigation Multimedia Radio 1 Press the menu hard key 2 Select system setup soft key 3 Press the camera setup soft key es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 4 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting e Power Sunroof Switch If Equipped enable rear camera in reverse soft key and pressing the Power Sliding Rear Window Switch If Equipped save soft key 5 Press the save soft key e Universal Garage Door Opener If Equipped Turning ParkView On Or Off Without Navigation Multimedia Radio 1 Press the menu hard key 2 Select system setup soft key 3 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting enable rear camera in reverse soft key OVERHEAD CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED The overhead console is located on the headliner above the review mirror The overhead console contains the following features Overhead Console e Courtesy Reading Lights 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Courtesy Reading Lights Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is opened when the dimmer control is rotated to the courtesy light position full right position or when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter if equipped These lights are also operated individually as reading lights by pressing on the corresponding lens Front Cou
407. n activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Remote Start Comfort Sys When this feature is selected and the remote start is activated the heated steering wheel and driver heated es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 seat features will automatically turn on when tempera tures are below 40 F 4 4 C When temperatures are above 80 F 26 7 C the driver vented seat will turn on when remote start is activated These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the key is turned to RUN To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button is pressed To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Sound Horn With Lock When this feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lamps with Lock feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark ap pears next to the feature show
408. n and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 a NJ OH XX sD ee yH 42 eu WATER IW FURL REAR NDOW WNDSHELD WIPER EXTERION UL HIGH BEAM Tug siias tin WFER VTERMITTENT FAILURE amp OOGSs sx 020 n S eS Lr xD dex e E 8 AWD 3 namime MARSON CONDI HUE Fae OS GUT Oan Cae STE ETE MEL EE Os Mute mh ae G
409. n prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automati cally downloads your mobile phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from your mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 To call a name from the Uconnect Phonebook or downloaded Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to t
410. n protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that the engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 641 WARNING Disposal Of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre with your local authorities to determine the disposal caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it causes pressure to build up in the cooling system to remain in puddles on the groun
411. n to occur The preferred ee STARTING AND OPERATING 415 method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L Av with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph 3 to 2D 5 km h m LN ond e Do not attempt to shift into or from 4L while the transmission is in gear Transfer Case Position Indicator Light The Transfer Case Position Indicator Light in the instrument cluster is used to alert the driver that the front axle is fully engaged and all four wheels are driving Transfer Case Switch Four Position This electronically shifted transfer case provides four mode positions e Two wheel drive high range 2WD e Four wheel drive lock range 4WD LOCK e Four wheel drive low range 4WD LOW e Neutral NEUTRAL Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Four Position Switch If Equipped This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch Transfer Case Switch which is located on the instrument panel 416 STARTING AND OPERATING xs This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the two wheel drive position 2WD for normal street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads When additional traction is required the transfer case 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is ac
412. nannaa aaa 531 e oreet EE RCET Us 537 3 7L And 4 7L Engine iss 531 Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel DAL ENGINE gu ood odin ng whe Soe eh es 531 Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles 538 Star ng 4 tee oy dece yere See eS 538 Cruising Range lesse 539 Replacement Parts 539 Maintenance 6 6 6 0 eee eee 539 WM Adding Fuel 00 e eee eee 540 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 541 a Vehicle Loading 2 iae nn 541 Certification Label 0 541 H Trailer Towing 2 rzsso ous eevee se vow es 544 Common Towing Definitions 544 Trailer Hitch Classification 548 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings 549 Trailer And Tongue Weight Towing Requirements Towing Tips ll Snowplow 1500 Models Only 2500 3500 Models Only ll Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Recreational Towing Two Wheel Drive Models Recreational Towing Four Wheel Drive Models 374 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 553 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 375 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belt The starter should not be operated for more than 15 second
413. ncy use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as 508 STARTING AND OPERATING Emm your original equipment tire replace or repair the Tire Spinning original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not first opportunity spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without WARNING stopping when you are stuck Limited use spares are for emergency use only In Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle Emergencies for further information handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicl
414. nd seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism e Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism e The RES Media Center is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se NOTE Bjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released o
415. nd pelvic bones but across Q your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt may not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in a vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immedi ately and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is L comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor aa will withdraw any slack in the belt 022632032 Removing Slack From Belt 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc or if the air bag deployed Regular Cab Front Center Three Point Belt 1 The front center seat belt on the Regular Cab may be disconnected to open up utilization of the storage areas behind the front seats The black latch plate can be detached from the black keyed
416. nd pretensioners Advanced Front Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide im proved protection for the driver and front passenger Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensor s signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags SABIC air bags if equipped SAB air bags if equipped and front seat belt pretensioners if equipped as required depending on the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear rollover or side collisions The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce sub stantial vehicle damage for example some pole colli sions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration
417. nd say USB or Switch to USB Once in the iPod USB MP3 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ses control mode audio tracks if available from audio device start playing over the vehicle s audio system Play Mode When switched to iPod USB MP3 control mode the iPod or external USB device automatically starts Play mode In Play mode the following buttons on the radio faceplate may be used to control the iPod or external USB device and display data e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track or press the VR button and say Next Track e Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click will jump to the previous track in the list or press the VR button and say Previous Track e Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the lt lt RW button Holding the lt lt RW button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF gt gt button A single press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward respectively for five seconds Use the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track Pressing the SEEK gt gt button during play mode will jump to the next track in the list or press the VR button and say Next or Previous Track
418. nd time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is
419. ndicator illuminated will eventually cause se vere transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire e Loose Gascap Indicator If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indicator will display in the telltale display area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Oil Change Due Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Due message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily
420. ndicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for more information e SERV 4WD The SERV 4WD light monitors the electric shift SERV 4WD system If the SERV 4WD light stays on or 4 comes on during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required e Transmission Temperature Light This light indicates that there is excessive trans mission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing It may also occur when operating the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condition such as 4 wheel drive operation e g snow plowing off road operation If this light comes on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light goes off CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture I
421. neces sary to prevent damage to the vehicle Two Wheel Drive Models The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed If flatbed equipment is not available and the transmis sion is operable the vehicle may be towed with rear wheels on the ground with the transmission in NEU TRAL Speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h and the distance must not exceed 15 miles 24 km CAUTION Towing faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km with rear wheels on the ground can cause severe damage to the transmission Such dam age is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a towing dolly or when using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight position with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 615 Four Wheel Drive Vehicles CAUTION The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the e Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and Internal damage to the transmission or transfer the opposi
422. never near the wire rope or snatch block Your situation may have other no people zones 814a0ddc No People Zones 15 Begin winching With the winching vehicles engine on and light tension already on the wire rope begin winching slowly and steadily Be sure that the wire rope is winding evenly and tightly around the spooling drum ee STARTING AND OPERATING 471 For additional assistance the winched vehicle can be NOTE slowly driven while being pulled by the winch Continue e Avoid overheating the winch motor For extended pulling until the vehicle is on stable ground If you are winching stop at reasonable intervals to allow the able to drive the vehicle the winching operation is winch motor to cool down complete e What to look for under load The wire rope must always spool onto the drum as indicated by the drum rotation decal on the winch As you power in make sure the wire rope winds evenly and tightly on the drum This prevents the outer wire wraps from draw ing into the inner wraps binding and damaging the wire rope Avoid shock loads by using the control switch intermittently to take up wire rope slack Shock loads can momentarily far exceed the winch and wire rope ratings During side pulls the wire rope tends to stack up at one end of the drum This stack can become large enough to cause serious damage to the winch So line up pulls as straight ahead as possible and stop winching if the wire rope comes clos
423. ng to the front Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench 060609051 4x2 Jacking Location en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 597 060609050 4x4 Jacking Location For 4x2 and 4x4 trucks when changing a rear wheel assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube Place the jack under the axle between the spring and the shock absorber with the drive tubes extending to the rear 060609073 m Rear Jacking Location All Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench 598 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME CAUTION Before raising the wheel off the ground make sure that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack position as required NOTE If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial thumbwheel by hand it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in order to lower the jack 4 By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise raise the vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle unstable and cause a collision It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 5 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off On single rear wheel SRW trucks install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the wheel nuts toward the wheel On 3500 dual rear wheel models DRW the wheel nuts are a two p
424. ngers Front seat belts may incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occu pant energy during an impact event Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen ger Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC if equipped Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB if equipped e An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants All seat belt systems except driver s and second row center position include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjust ing the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of
425. not be available the GAIN setting will illuminate and the correct type of trailer must be selected from the EVIC options 4 Press the UP or DOWN button on the steering wheel until System Setup appears on the screen Messages 0 Units English System Setup Turn Menu Off mi 057064401 5 Press the SELECT button and then press the UP or DOWN buttons until Trailer Brake Type appears on the screen STARTING AND OPERATING 561 System Setup Headlamps with Wipers Trailer Brake 7 Light Electric Heavy Flectric AUT Light EOH HawwyEDH Power Dclay Taller Bray Type 057064402 057064403 6 Press the SELECT button and then press the UP or NOTE 1500 Models Only Light Electric and Heavy DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer Brake Type Electric will only be available due to the tow capacities of appears on the screen the vehicle 7 Use the GAIN adjustment buttons to increase or decrease the GAIN setting to the desired starting point A GAIN setting of 5 is a good starting point 562 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss 8 In a traffic free environment tow the trailer on a dry level surface at a speed of 20 25 mph 30 40 km h and squeeze the manual brake control lever completely 9 If the trailer wheels lockup indicated by squealing tires reduce the GAIN setting if the trailer wheels turn freely increase the GAIN setting Repeat Steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting
426. not be used as cargo tie down When vehicle is in motion do not exceed 150 lbs 68 kg load on the tailgate The bed extender is not intended for off road use When not in use the extender divider should be in stowed or divider position with the tailgate closed 3 Locking Tab When in use all handles are to be in the locked position 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Bed Rail Tie Down System CAUTION The maximum load per cleat should not exceed 250 Ibs 113 kg and the angle of the load on each cleat should not exceed 45 degrees above horizontal or damage to the cleat or cleat rail may occur There are two adjustable cleats on each side of the bed that can be used to assist in securing cargo 038106531 A v Each cleat must be located and tightened down in one of the detents along either rail in order to keep cargo properly secure ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 To move the cleat to any position on the rail turn the nut To remove the cleats from the utility rail remove the end counterclockwise approximately three turns Then pull cap by pushing up on the locking tab located on the out on the cleat and slide it to the detent nearest the bottom of the end cap Slide the cleat off the end of the desired location Make sure the cleat is seated in the rail detent and tighten the nut 038106533 038106532 Utility Rail End Cap 1 Utility Rail Detent 2 Cleat Re
427. not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty 626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed ser
428. nspect the brake hoses and lines The spark plugs located on the side of the engine are a premium plug and must be changed every 96 000 miles 156 000 km es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 683 8 000 Miles 13 000 km or 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 8 000 miles 13 000 km M Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 16 000 Miles 26 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule LJ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 16 000 miles 26 000 km 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 16 000 miles 26 000 km or 12 months ood Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Cent
429. nstructions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 Operating Instructions Voice Command System lf Equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User ome Gomme mee om 9 oe Manual located on the DVD for further details Ca Tr IL me Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details War idm imt MEDIA CENTER 130 SALES CODE RES NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right Cua aid side of the radio faceplate Media Center 130 RES Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio
430. nt of manual override features NOTE Each of these features operate independently from each other If any one feature is controlled manually the temperature doors will continue to operate automati cally There are six fixed blower speeds Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the OFF position 045605986 Blower Control The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control knob The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the following positions Panel Mode gt gt Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be rotated to regulate or shut off the airflow from these outlets Bi Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets and defrost outlets NOTE In many temperature positions the BI LEVEL mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets 364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Floor Mode Air comes from th
431. nts and objects as well as protect liv ing trees Operating Your Winch WARNING Failure to observe any of these warnings regarding proper winch usage may result in severe injury e Always use supplied hook strap to hold the hook when spooling wire rope in or out Never use as a hoist Never use to move persons Never exceed winch or wire rope rated capacity Always wear heavy leather gloves when handling the wire rope Never touch wire rope or hook while in tension or under load Never engage or disengage clutch if winch is under load wire rope is in tension or wire rope drum is moving Continued e Always stand clear of wire rope and load and keep others away during winching Always keep hands and clothing clear of the wire rope hook and fairlead opening during operation and when spooling Never wrap wire rope back onto itself Always use a choker chain wire choker rope or tree trunk protector on the anchor Never attach a recovery strap to the winch hook to increase the length of a pull Never attempt to tow a vehicle with the recovery strap attached directly to the winch hook Continued 462 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Never use bungee straps that develop tremen dous and potentially dangerous amounts of force when stretched Always disconnect the remote control when not in use Never winch when there are less than five wraps of wire rope
432. nued 480 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury CAUTION If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunc tion is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately BRAKE SYSTEM If power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function However you will experience a substantial increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal braking capability the remaining system will still func tion with some loss of overall braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during applica tion greater pedal force required to slow or stop and activation of the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light if equipped during brake use 3500 Dual Rear Wheel Models Only The brake system power assist is provided by a hydro boost unit which shares fluid with the power steering system You may experience some clicking or hissing noises from the hydro boost system during hard braking conditions NOTE Under cold temperatures pedal effort will be higher than n
433. o rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 491 Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the ee Electronic Stability Control ESC is off OFF Trailer Sway Control TSC If Equipped The TSC system uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appro priate actions to attempt to stop the sway The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel s to c
434. o retainers in the outer box side panel unlock it from the housing 5 Pull the bulb straight out of the socket CAUTION Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces Shortened bulb life will result 6 Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and housing 073306035 E MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 669 Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL With 2 Separate the connector holding the housing and wir Cargo Lamp ing harness to the body 1 Remove the two screws holding the housing lens to the body as shown 3 Turn the desired bulb socket turn and remove the sodz7bs7 socket and bulb from housing 670 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket CAUTION Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces Shortened bulb life will result e Outside Bulbs Cargo Lamps e Inside Bulb Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 5 Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs and housing es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 671 Cab Top Clearance Lamps If Equipped 2 Rotate the socket turn and pull it from the lamp 1 Remove the two screws from the top of the lamp assembly 80ecdc9b 672 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Pull the bulb straight from it s socket and replace ecdcat 2 Turn the socket 1 4 turn counterclockwise to access
435. o faster than road conditions permit ee STARTING AND OPERATING 413 NOTE Delayed shifts out of four wheel drive may be experienced due to uneven tire wear low or uneven tire pressures excessive vehicle loading or cold tempera tures WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2H Rear Wheel Drive High Range This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads 4H Four Wheel Drive High Range This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only N Neutral This range disengages the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information 414 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss 4L Four Wheel Drive Low Range This range locks the front and rea
436. o not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect driveability 540 STARTING AND OPERATING ADDING FUEL NOTE When removing the fuel filler cap lay the cap The fuel filler cap gas cap is located behind the fuel tether in the hook located on the fuel filler door filler door on the left side of the vehicle Open the fuel door and remove the fuel cap by turning it counter CAUTION clockwise e Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into the fuel system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Fuel Filler Cap WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The MIL in
437. o regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment Rotating the knob coun terclockwise from top center into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures Rotating the knob clockwise into the red area indicates warmer temperatures NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumu lation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Mode Control Air Direction Mode control allows you to choose from several patterns of air distribu tion You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols or a blend of two of these modes The closer the control is to a particular mode the more air distribution you receive from that mode 358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Panel Mode gt gt Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow Bi Level Mode Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE There is a difference in temperature in any conditions other than full cold or full hot between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny
438. oad floor While driving or in an accident you may experience abrupt stopping rapid acceleration or sharp turns Loose objects stored on the load floor may move around with force and strike occupants resulting in serious or fatal injury 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Unfolding the Load Floor 2 Grasp the knob on the load floor and lift the knob until 3 Lait the 60 40 Seat cushi n g the load floor unfolds into position to the upward position 036606529 Ce 036606529 Unfolding The Load Float Load Floor In Open Position 3 Reverse the procedure to store the load floor ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 Positioning the Load Floor for Storage Access Under the Seat 1 Lift the 60 40 seat cushion s to the upward position 2 Unsnap the securing snap located at either side of the load floor 3 Lift the load floor up to access storage under the load floor WARNING Do not drive with the load floor in the up position 036006530 When stopping fast or in an accident the load floor Load Floor Securing Straps could move to the down position causing serious 4 Reverse the procedure to put the load floor back in the injury secured down position before you operate the vehicle 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se RAMBOX IF EQUIPPED RamBox Integrated Box Side Storage Bins The RamBox system is an integrated pickup box storage Cargo
439. oading Information Placard 811ad0d6 Tire Placard Location ee STARTING AND OPERATING 499 This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWKRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never
440. omatic Transmission Towing 5 000 Ibs 2268 kg std 7 400 lbs 3356 kg max Payload 1 540 lbs 698 kg max Towing 5 000 Ibs 2268 kg std 10 250 Ibs 4649 kg max Payload 1 510 Ibs 685 kg max Towing 5 000 lbs 2268 kg std 7 450 lbs 3379 kg max Payload 1 560 Ibs 708 kg max Towing 5 000 lbs 2268 kg std 10 250 lbs 4649 kg max Payload 1 530 lbs 694 kg max Towing 5 000 lbs 2268 kg std 9 850 Ibs 4468 kg max Payload 1 610 Ibs 730 kg max 552 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Ram 2500 amp 3500 2500 Power Wagon 2500 ST SLT Bighorn 3500 ST SLT Bighorn Lonestar Laramie Out Lonestar Laramie Out doorsman doorsman 5 7L HEMI V 8 6 Speed Towing 10 100 Ibs Towing 12 300 Ibs Automatic Transmission 4581 kg max 5579 kg max Payload 1 780 Ibs Payload 3 120 lbs 807 kg max 1415 kg max 6 7L Cummins Turbo Towing 13 350 Ibs Towing 14 050 Ibs Diesel I 6 6 Speed 6055 kg max 6372 kg max Manual Transmission E Payload 2 490 Ibs Payload 5 050 Ibs 1129 kg max 2291 kg max 6 7L Cummins Turbo Towing 15 450 Ibs Towing 22 700 lbs Diesel I 6 6 Speed 7008 kg max 10296 kg max Automatic Transmission E Payload 2 580 Ibs Payload 5 130 Ibs 1170 kg max 2327 kg max STARTING AND OPERATING 553 NOTE For additional trailer towing information maxi mum trailer weight ratings ref
441. on Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im mediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Con continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning troller ORC system serviced as well Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the air bags will not be in place to protect you 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE xe WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an ai
442. on Apply the parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precau tion turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade ee STARTING AND OPERATING 403 WARNING WARNING Continued e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever clockwise without first pull ing it toward you after you have placed it in PARK Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pe
443. on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type 656 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Spray On Bedliner If Equipped During ownership the shine and luster of the Spray On Bedliner can fade from ox
444. on and the shift then the desired position indicator light will flash engine either OFF or running shift the transmission into continuously while the original position indicator light NEUTRAL is ON until all requirements have been met 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 3 Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired e The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a position shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing 4 After the desired position indicator light is ON not flashing shift the transmission back into gear 422 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Five Position Switch If Equipped This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch Transfer Case Switch which is located on the instrument panel awo 4wn AUTO LOCK 4wp LOW 2WD oa NEUTRAL 051905843 Transfer Case Switch Five Position This electronically shifted transfer case provides five mode positions Two wheel drive high range 2WD e Four wheel drive automatic range 4WD AUTO e Four wheel drive lock range 4WD LOCK e Four wheel drive low range 4WD LOW e Neutral NEUTRAL This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the two wheel drive position 2W
445. ons the clutch automatically disengages NOTE e The torque converter clutch will not engage and the transmission will not shift into the top overdrive gear until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are ee STARTING AND OPERATING 401 warm usually after 1 to 3 miles 1 6 to 4 8 km of driving Because top gear is disabled and the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when cold This is normal Using the Electronic Range Select ERS feature when the trans mission is sufficiently warm will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive If the vehicle has not been driven for several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans mission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This condition is normal and will not cause damage to the transmission The torque con verter will refill within five seconds after starting the engine Six Speed Automatic Transmission 5 7L Engine 2500 Models Only The shift lever position display located in the instrument panel cluster indicates the transmission gear range The shift lever is mounted on the right side of the steering column You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of the PARK position refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock Sys
446. ontact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes 704 Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete l
447. ontinue playing the disc by skipping forward 1 0 to 3 0 seconds at a time If the end To change the current file use the remote control s or of the disc is reached the DVD player will return to the DVD player s A button to advance to the next file or beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of the the V button to return to the start of the current or first track previous file To change the current directory use the remote con trol s PROG Up and Down buttons 348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot Display conditions such as when the vehicle s interior tempera Other Language Setup ture is above 120 F When this occurs the DVD player will display VES High Temp and will shut off the VESTM displays until a safe temperature is reached This shut down is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD f Mark Y aco Waseect player Menu Language Japanose Engl ish Other Wrta Audio Language Japanese English i Other ox xxx Sub Title P Japanese i Language Engl sh Other xxxkx DVD Player Language Menu ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349 All of the Language settings have a special Other setting e Using the remote control Up and Down cursor but to accommodate languages other than Japanese or Eng tons select a digit for the current position After lish These languages are selected using a special four selecting the digit press the
448. ontrols And Indicators 1 Power Turns the screen and wireless headphone transmitter for the selected Channel on or off To hear audio while the screen is closed press the Power button to turn the headphone transmitter on 2 Channel Selector Indicators When a button is pressed the currently affected channel or channel button is illuminated momentarily 3 Light Turns the remote control backlighting on or off The remote backlighting turns off automatically after five seconds 4 Channel Screen Selector Switch Indicates which channel is being controlled by the remote control When the selector switch is in the Channel 1 position the remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel 1 right side of the screen When the selector switch is in the Channel 2 position the remote controls the function ality of headphone Channel 2 left side of the screen 5 gt In radio modes press to seek the next tunable station In disc modes press and hold to fast forward through the current audio track or video chapter In menu modes use to navigate in the menu ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333 6 V Prev In radio modes press to select to the previous station In disc modes press to advance to the start of the current or previous audio track or video chapter In menu modes use to navigate in the menu 7 MENU Press to return to the main menu of a DVD disc to select a satellite audio channel from the Sta
449. or any other reason with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating and Towing a Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 385 DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris tics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the Electronic Range Select ERS feature described below to select a lower gear range Under these conditions using a lower gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup If the transmission operating temperature exceeds normal operating limits the powertrain controller will modify the transmission shift schedule and expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating If the transmission becomes extremely hot the Trans mission Temperature Warning Light may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out of Over
450. or button to select the next digit Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits e After the four digit password is entered press the remote control s ENTER button If the password is correct the set password screen is displayed e Using the remote control s Up and Down cursor buttons to set the value for the current digit and the remote control s Right cursor button to select digits DVD Player Level Menu enter the new password 352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M To set the rating activate the DVD Setup Menu and follow these additional instructions e Using the remote control s Left and Right cursor buttons select the Rating tab Highlight Change Rating and then press the remote control s ENTER button e Enter the current password Select a digit use the remote control s Up and Down cursor buttons to set the value for the current digit and then press the remote control s Right cursor button to select the next digit Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits e After the four digit password is entered press the remote control s ENTER button If the password is correct the Rating Level menu is displayed e Using the remote control s Up and Down cursor buttons select the new rating level and then press the remote control s ENTER button to accept the change Product Agreement This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U
451. or frequent trailer towing Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary OOOO CO C O C O M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 688 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM 72 000 Miles 117 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 72 000 miles 117 000 km J Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only J Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 80 000 Miles 130 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule mi mi a Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 80 000 mile
452. or the entire disc even if it is recorded in a compatible format and is playable on other players To help avoid playback problems use the following guide lines when recording discs e Open sessions are ignored Only sessions that are closed are playable e For multi session CDs that contain only multiple CD Audio sessions the player will renumber the tracks so each track number is unique 346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M For CD Data or CD ROM discs always use the ISO 9660 Level 1 or Level 2 Joliet or Romeo format Other formats such as UDF HFS or others are not supported The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99 folders per CD R and CD RW disc Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play the Video_TS portion of the disc If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is playable in the VES DVD player check with the disc recording software publisher for more information about burning playable discs The recommended method for labeling recordable discs CD R CD RW and DVD R is with a permanent marker Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the disc become stuck and cause permanent damage to the DVD player Compressed Audio Files MP3 and WMA The DVD player is capable of playing MP3 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 and WMA Windows Media Audio files from a CD Data disc usually a CD R or CD RW e The DVD player always uses the file extension to determine the
453. or up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires 526 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS Tire Light Load Inflation Switch Description 2500 Models If Equipped WARNING Never operate your vehicle with the TPMS and tire pressures set to the Light Load Inflation Pressure settings if carrying more than two occupants 150 Ibs 68 kg each plus 200 Ibs 91 kg of cargo The vehicle Light Load Definition is found in the Supplemen tal Tire Pressure Information Label which is located on the rear face of the driver door opening Failure to do so may cause you to lose control resulting in a collision causing serious or fatal injury The TPMS tire light load inflation switch will allow the driver to switch between the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold and the light load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold depending on the vehicle s load condition The Tire and Loading Information label defines the recommended front and rear cold tire inflation pressures for the vehicle when operating in the Max Load condition A Supple mental Tire Pressure Information label is also available defining Light Load tire inflation pressures when oper ating in the Light Load condition When the tire light load inflation switch LED is
454. ormal until the power steering fluid reaches operating temperature ee STARTING AND OPERATING 481 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti Lock Brake Sys tem ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Hill Start Assist HSA Electronic Stability Control ESC and Trailer Sway Control TSC All of the systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC Anti Lock Brake System ABS The ABS aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking NOTE ABS improves steering control of the vehicle during hard braking maneuvers WARNING e ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that af forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control
455. ossible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 30 Transmission Temperature Warning Light This light indicates that there is excessive trans mission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing It may also occur when operating the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condition such as 4 wheel drive operation e g snow plowing off road operation If this 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss light comes on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light goes off CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this warn ing light will display in the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC If Equipped for further information 31 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN th
456. ot been met the transfer case will not shift The position indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met To retry a shift return the control knob back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again ee STARTING AND OPERATING 427 e If all the requirements to select a new transfer case position have been met the current position indicator light will turn OFF the selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift When the shift is complete the position indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON 2WD 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position Shifts between 2WD and 4WD AUTO and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelera tor pedal after turning the control switch If the vehicle is stopped the ignition switch must be in the ON position with the engine either running or OFF This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position 2WD Or 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK 4WD LOW NOTE When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may be heard This noise is normal
457. otection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with
458. ottle two footed driving When climbing rocks logs or other stepped objects using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from jerking or lurching This technique is also used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline The Basics Of Off Road Driving You will encounter many types of terrain driving off road You should be familiar with the terrain and area before proceeding There are many types of surface conditions hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow and ice Every surface has a different effect on your vehicle s steering handling and traction Control ling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off road driving so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good driving posture Avoid sudden accelerations turns or braking In most cases there are no ee STARTING AND OPERATING 435 road signs posted speed limits or signal lights Therefore you will need to use your own good judgment on what is safe and what isn t When on a trail you should always be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in terrain The key is to plan your future driving route while remembering what you are currently driving over CAUTION Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials The heat from your vehicle exhaust system could cause a fire WARNING Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo Unsecured cargo can be
459. ould result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle The following indicators should be used to ensure that Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be When shifting into PARK pull the column mounted seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key shift lever toward you and move it all the way fob in the vehicle A child could operate power counterclockwise until it stops For console mounted windows other controls or move the vehicle shifter move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops 394 STARTING AND OPERATING Se e Release the shift lever and make sure it is fully seated in the PARK gate e Look at the shift lever position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position e With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle rearward Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL This range is for when the vehicle is standing for pro longed periods with the engine running The engine may be started in t
460. ounteract the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized No driver action is re quired Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer Towing in Starting and Operating for further information When TSC is functioning the ESP Off Indicator Light will flash the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off or Full Off modes 492 STARTING AND OPERATING TSC is only active in the default ESC On mode TSC TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION can be disabled by pressing the ESC Off switch and entering ESC Partial Off mode It is not active in the ESC Partial Off or ESC Off modes Refer to the ESC portion of this section for an explanation of the different ESC operating modes WARNING If TSC activates while driving slow the vehicle Tire Markings down stop at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway 054903773 1 U S DOT Safety 4 Maximum Load Standards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades en STARTING AND OPERATING 493 NOTE P P
461. our trailer manufacturer or dealer Refer to the following illustrations e Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it may cause damage to the electrical system and electronic modules of the vehicle See your authorized dealer if 0 0O an aftermarket module is to be installed Comme O O Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size 2 0O stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety Or O4 The Trailer Tow Package will include a four and seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer har ness and connector 057003766 Four Pin Connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle s 1 Female Pins 4 Park wiring harness 2 Male Pin 5 Left Stop Turn 3 Ground 6 Right Stop Turn 564 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING US o S Any work done to the vehicle s electrical system or wiring should be performed by a qualified automo tive technician If done improperly it may cause damage to the electrical system wiring and could result in serious or fatal injury Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy traffic yd Seven Pin Connector 057003765 Automatic Transmission 1 Battery 5 Ground n p 2 Backup Lamps 6 Left Stop Turn The DRIVE range can be selected w
462. our vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options and cargo The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi cle s GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 543 Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo
463. ove the accuracy of the oil level readings Always intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the components as the chemicals can damage your dipstick Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at engine transmission power steering or air condi the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the tioning Such damage is not covered by the New top of the safe zone on these engines Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed CAUTION because of component malfunction use only the Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off specified fluid for the flushing procedure oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage Engine Oil your engine Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the Change Engine Oil engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information 628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and max
464. overdrive gear are inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch in this section During extremely cold temperatures 16 F 27 C or below operation may briefly be limited to first and direct gears only Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to oper ate Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps Stop the vehicle Shift the transmission into PARK Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK OFF position 1 2 3 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 397 NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your au
465. owered 0 000 ce eee 101 Heated ce 102 MemOLy secies ese es crese a ees E ias 156 OUTSIDE iones order BaP eS dere PR Re deu ue 99 Rearview 22 222 94 RUP 4974 35 98 Trailer Towing 5n eL EY satri 104 Mode Fuel Saver llle 276 277 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System 517 Mopar Parts med 825 4 er ae RS 625 702 MTBE ETBE eee 532 Multi Displacement Engine System 478 Multi Function Control Lever 167 Navigation System Uconnect gps 187 New Vehicle Break In Period 85 ee INDEX 719 Occupant Restraints ce sss oaie iyane 38 62 66 Occupant Restraints Sedan 59 60 62 65 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 531 Odometer ees 254 255 THp seater prea tide E ER Reader 254 255 Off Pavement Driving Off Road 433 454 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 433 454 Oil Change Indicator 004 257 275 Oil Change Indicator Reset 257 275 Oil Engine ess sabes ae PES Foe ed aad 627 676 Capacity a ans cule ch oe diver E gs 674 Change Interval 0005 627 Dips ck ox ses ie duke esd ae E DRESS 627 Disposal i264 Wie hay used ped ese Saks 629 Filter sesers ireas bred REY Bs 629 676 Filter Disposal 0 00 0005 629 Identification Logo 11 eee 628 Materials Added to
466. owing Water Flowing water can be extremely heading slightly upstream using the low and slow dangerous Never attempt to cross a fast running technique stream or river even in shallow water Fast moving water can easily push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control Even in very shallow water a high current can still wash the dirt out from around your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle damage with slower water currents in depths greater than the vehicle s running ground clearance You should never attempt to cross flowing water which is deeper than the vehicle s running ground clearance Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle downstream out of control if the water is deep enough to push on the large surface area of the vehicle s body Before you proceed determine the speed of the current the water s depth approach angle bottom condition Never drive through fast moving deep water It can push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control This could put you and your passengers at risk of injury or drowning Airing Down For Off Road Driving Running lower tire pressure off road can improve your ride comfort and vehicle traction Reducing the tire air pressure allows the tire to bulge slightly improving its surface area for better flotation and ability to mold or form to the ground contour Different terrain tires and veh
467. owing procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop leaving it con nected to the tow vehicle 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 3 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position but do not start the engine 4 Press and hold the brake pedal 5 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 6 Press and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL button located by the selector switch until the NEUTRAL indicator light turns off 7 After the NEUTRAL indicator light turns off release the NEUTRAL button 8 After the NEUTRAL button has been released the transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the selector switch NOTE When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid gear clash 9 Shift the transmission into PARK 10 Release the brake pedal 11 Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle 12 Start the engine 13 Press and hold the brake pedal 14 Release the parking brake 15 Shift the transmission into gear release the brake pedal and check that the vehicle operates normally ee STARTING AND OPERATING 579 NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position e Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met for a transfer case shift to take place and for the prior to pressing the transfer case NEUTRAL button and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed If any of these requirements are not met pr
468. owing the system has been deactivated Automatic High Beams If Equipped When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Refer to Lights SmartBeam If Equipped in Un derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Intermittent Wiper Options If Equipped When this feature is selected the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated When this feature is deactivated the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 Easy Entry Exit Seat If Equipped When this feature is selected it provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when enter ing and exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark ap pears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivate
469. own the window and open the door with the outside door handle 1021905731 Power Window Switches 1 Left Front 3 Right Rear 2 Right Front 4 Left Rear E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a The control on the left front door panel has UP DOWN switches that give you fingertip control of all power windows There is a single opening and closing switch on the front passenger door for passenger window control and on the rear doors of Quad Cab Mega Cab and Crew Cab models The windows will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or until a front door is opened NOTE The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the power windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF This feature is cancelled when either front door is opened number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window switch have an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement op erate the switch in either the up or down dir
470. oyment E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 e Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during WARNING Continued deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed e Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side air bags the perfor The system includes side impact sensors that are cali mance could be adversely affected and or objects brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that could be pushed into you causing serious injury require air bag occupant protection If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for instal lation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason WARNING e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the SABIC is located should re main free from any obstructions Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position front occu pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags Continued 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Along with seat belts a
471. pe If trapped in the storage bin children can die from suffocation or heat stroke In an accident serious injury could result if the storage bin covers are not properly latched Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers open Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se RamBox Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever If Equipped As a security measure a Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release is built into the storage bin cover latching mecha E B 022506 a3 o Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever NOTE In the event of an individual being locked inside the storage bin the storage bin cover can be opened from inside of the bin by pulling on the glow in the dark lever attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism Bed Extender If Equipped The bed extender has three functional positions e Storage Position e Divider Position e Extender Position ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229 Storage Position The storage position for the bed extender is at the front of the truck bed which maximizes the bed cargo area when not in use To install the bed extender into the storage position perform the following 1 Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to release the ext
472. pool the cable afterwards Never use a winch cable as a tow strap and always stand back while winching ee STARTING AND OPERATING 449 WARNING Winch cables are under high tension when in use and can become a projectile if they fail Never stand over or straddle the winch cable Never jerk or overload the winch cable Never stand in front of the vehicle while winching Failure to follow these instructions can result in serious or fatal injury After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have the radiator fan brake rotors wheels brake linings an
473. press the amp button and say Setup followed by Emergency e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour To use your Uconnect Phone System in an emer Towing Assistance coverage details on the DVD in gency your mobile phone must be the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24 Hour e turned on Towing Assistance references e paired to the Uconnect System e If supported this number may be programmable on and have network coverage some systems To do this press the amp button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the mobile phone directly ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect Phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally
474. r RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited Fo
475. r VBR bit rate MPEG Specification Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 MPEG Ae UENO api d 96 80 61 56 45 Layer 3 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as
476. r the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features System Setup in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but no longer than ten seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm System Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Flash Lamps With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit
477. r and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels It is recommended you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 511 WARNING WARNING Continued e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having that specified for your vehicle Some combinations adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus failure and lo
478. r bag system Continued made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service If your seat includ ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities contact your autho rized dealer E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 Air Bag Warning Light You will want to have the air bags ready to 9 inflate for your protection in a collision The N Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately e The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position e The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your pr
479. r driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Shifting Procedure Manually Shifted Transfer Case 2H e 4H Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion If the vehicle is in motion shifts can be made up to 55 mph 88 km h With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelera tor pedal after completing the shift Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever 2H Or 4H 4L With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift the transmission into NEUTRAL While the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired position Do not pause in transfer case NEUTRAL NOTE e Pausing in transfer case NEUTRAL in vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may require shutting the engine OFF to avoid gear clash while completing the shift If difficulty occurs shift the transmission into NEUTRAL hold foot on brake and turn the engine OFF Make shift to the desired mode e Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle completely stopped however difficulty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completio
480. r large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 o
481. r to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped CLIMATE CONTROLS The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the temperature amount and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle The controls are located on the instrument panel below the radio 356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE During snowplow usage on vehicles equipped with outside temperature displa
482. r understeer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ee STARTING AND OPERATING 487 ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appro priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position All Two Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK Modes Can Choose The Following ESC Operating Modes ESC On This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 2WD 4WD AUTO 4WD LOCK modes and in 2WD vehicles When ever the vehicle is started or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD LOW or Neutral back to 4WD LOCK or 4WD AUTO the ESC system will be in this mode This mode should be used for almost all driving situations ESC should only be turned to Partial Off or ESP Off for specific reasons as noted below 488 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent ac
483. rake fluid can also Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be tion This inspection should be made with the vehicle in taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces a level position Continued nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 647 For 1500 Model axles the fluid level should be even with the bottom of the fill hole within 1 4 in 6 4 mm of edge of hole for the FDU215 HD front axle and C235FE rear axle For all 2500 3500 Model axles the fluid level should be 1 4 in 1 4 in 6 4 mm 6 4 mm below the fill hole on the 9 25 in front and 3 4 in 1 4 in 19 mm 6 4 mm on 10 5 in rear axles The 11 5 in rear axle level should be 1 4 in 1 4 in 6 4 mm 6 4 mm below the fill hole Drain And Refill Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Lubricant Selection Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information NOTE The presence of water in the gear lubricant will result in corrosion and possible failure of differential components Operation of the vehicle in water as may be encountered in some off highway types of service will require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage Limited Slip Differentials 1500 Model rear axles
484. rated to inflate the side curtain air bag The inflating side curtain air bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The air bag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain air bag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Front And Side Impact Sensors If Equipped In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key
485. re Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Five Position Switch If Equipped Shifting Procedure lll Axle Locker System 2500 Models Only If Equipp d ssie s ele y kde EE exe Rex 411 MiStabilizer Sway Bar System Power Wagon ONY Pm 431 411 W Safe Off Road Driving Power Wagon Only 000002005 433 Off Road Driving Tips And Vehicle Characteristics scs esr ba d es 433 Driving In Snow Mud And Sand 435 Crossing Obstacles Rocks And Other High Points 437 Ehll Climbing es er Re Rees 439 Driving Through Water 442 Airing Down For Off Road Driving 444 Vehicle Recovery eemper 445 After Driving Off Road 449 Bl Limited Slip Differential 450 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 371 E Driving On Slippery Surfaces Acceleration Traction lll Driving Through Water Flowing Rising Water Shallow Standing Water ll Off Road Driving Tips After Driving Off Road ll Winch Usage Power Wagon Only If Equipped ss sy duet BA AA nes wd eee Things To Know Before Using Your Winch Understanding The Features Of Your Winch Winch Accessories Operating Your Winch 0 0 461 Rigging Techniques lisse 474 WM Power St
486. re towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for the proper inspection procedure e An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required ee STARTING AND OPERATING 557 WARNING e Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have a CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they collision Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for addi tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in a collision should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Integrated Trailer Brake Module If Equipped Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake Mod ule ITBM for Electric and Electric Over Hydraulic EOH trailer brakes 558 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE This module ha
487. recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer
488. remote control s MENU button displays a list of all available channels Navigate this list using the remote control s navigation buttons A V to find the desired station press the remote control s ENTER button to tune to that station To jump through the list more quickly navigate to the Page Up and Page Down icons on the screen Disc Menu EB Disc Menu 2 SAT amp 2 M s WEATHER Preset Start Scan 5 Stop Random WEATHER The Weather Channel The Weather Channel Mother Nature gt 3 Disc Menu For CDs E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343 When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc pressing the remote control s MENU button displays a list of all commands which control playback of the disc Using the options you can activate or cancel Scan play and Random play Display Settings Setup Brightness 415 gt Contrast Tint Color Aspect Auto Default Settings Dise Features Video Screen Display Settings When watching a video source DVD Video with the disc in Play mode Aux Video SIRIUS Backseat TV etc pressing the remote control s SETUP button activates the Display Settings menu These settings control the appear ance of the video on the screen The factory default settings are already set for optimum viewing so there is no need to change these settings under normal circum stances To change the settings press the remote control s navi gation buttons A V to select an
489. remote control s Right digit code cursor button to select the next digit Repeat this digit To enter a new language code activate the DVD Setup Sectores queiiee Atal out dies Menu To enter DVD Setup Menu stop the DVD enter e When the entire four digit code is entered press the radio disc mode then DVD setup and follow these remote control s ENTER button If the language code additional instructions is not valid the numbers all change back to If the digits are visible after this step then the language code is valid e Using the remote control Up and Down cursor but tons highlight the Language item you want to edit and then press the remote control ENTER button Here is an abbreviated list of language codes For more language codes please contact the dealer where the e Using the remote control Down cursor button select vehicle was purchased the Other setting then press the remote control s Right cursor button to begin editing the setting Language Code Language Code Dutch 2311 French 1517 German 1304 Italian 1819 Portuguese 2519 Spanish 1418 350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Rating and Password Setup The Rating and Password settings work together to control the types of DVDs that your family watches Most DVD Video discs have a rating from 1 to 8 assigned to them where lower numbers are designated for all audiences and higher numbers are designated for more ad
490. replaced Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty The auxiliary power outlets can be found in the following locations e Lower left and lower right of the center stack without floor mounted shifter 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE e Inside the top storage tray with floor mounted shifter Power Outlet Upper Lid e Rear of the center console storage compartment Quad Cab or Crew Cab e Inside the upper lid of the center storage compartment if equipped UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 aS gt j mas 072736476 Power Outlet Rear Center Console Power Outlet Fuse Locations The key symbol indicates that this outlet can supply 1 M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Seat Opt or a s with Console Rear power when the key is in the ON RUN or ACC pes 2 M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel or tions with Console Front 3 M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Instrument Panel or All accessories connected to the outlet s should be with Console Center removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNI
491. ring wheel that insulates against heat such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position This feature allows the brake accelerator and clutch pedals if equipped to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of the steering column 031605590 Adjustable Pedals Switch e The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx e The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in WARNING REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys WARSING tem is on The following messages will be displayed Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle In You could lose control and have an accident Always formation System EVIC if the pedals are attempted to adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked be adjusted when the system is locked out Adjust able Pedal Disabled Cruise Control Engaged or ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL Adjustable Pedal Disabled Vehicle In Reverse When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater t
492. rmine the correct approach and your ability improve your traction and handling while driving on to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong the soft sand but you must return the tires to normal Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel bring the air pressure before driving on pavement or other hard vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle surfaces Be sure you have a way to air the tires back forward until it makes contact with the object Apply the up prior to reducing the pressure throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle up and over the object CAUTION WARNING Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and total loss of air pressure To reduce the risk of tire Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system unseating while at a reduced tire pressure reduce your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu vers loading which could cause you to loose control of your vehicle Using A Spotter Crossing Obstacles There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle Rocks And Other High Points or determine the correct path Determining the correct While driving off road you will encounter many types of path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting terrain These varying types of terrain bring different many obstacles In these cases have someone guide you types of obstacles Before proceeding review the path over through or around the obstacle H
493. rong buckle will not e A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your WARNING sid abdomen To ae slack in dc lap belt portion pull up WARMING on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if itis too tight e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision be at the strong hip a
494. ronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 6 km h To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new
495. rt up or illuminates during driving it means that the four wheel drive system is not function ing properly and that service is required WARNING Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the SVC 4WD Warning Light is illuminated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning This could cause damage to driveline components ee STARTING AND OPERATING 425 When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD 4WD AUTO or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position
496. rtesy Reading Lights UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 NOTE The courtesy reading lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle If the interior lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF they will extinguish after 15 minutes GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED 3 HomeLink replaces up to three hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motor ized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery Rear Passenger Courtesy Reading Light 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The HomeLink buttons that are located in the overhead console designate the three different HomeLink chan nels ow WW HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active Before You Begin Programming HomeLink Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming For more efficient programming and accurate transmis sion of the radio frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system Erase all channels before you begin programming To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON RUN position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III
497. s 130 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months or 104 000 miles 169 000 km whichever comes first Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 689 88 000 Miles 143 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 88 000 miles 143 000 km Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 690 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Ses gt 96 000 Miles 156 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 96 000 miles 156 000 km Replace the engine air
498. s are disabled The system provides both au dible and visible signals for the first three minutes the horn will sound and the headlights will turn on the park lamps and or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security Light will flash repeatedly For an additional 15 minutes only the headlights will turn on the park lamps and or turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash Rearming Of The System The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15 additional minutes of headlights turning on and Vehicle Security Light flashing if the system has not been disabled If the condition which initiated the alarm is still present the system will ignore that condition and moni tor the remaining doors and ignition To Arm The System The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the power door locks or use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to lock the doors After all the doors are locked and closed the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set After the alarm is set the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate that the system is armed To Disarm The System Use the RKE transmitter to unlock the door If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors and the exterior lights will blink three times Check the vehicle for tampering
499. s are now available Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the seat back tether anchorage have been available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will provide add on tether strap kits for some of their older products Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchor ages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or lap shoulder belt They will also have tether straps and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle NOTE e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in
500. s been designed and verified with electric trailer brakes and new electric over hydrau lic systems Some previous EOH systems may not be compatible with ITBM 1 GAIN Brake Output Power Display 2 Manual Brake Control Lever 3 Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light 4 GAIN Adjustment Buttons The user interface consists of the following GAIN Brake Output Power Display Shows the current GAIN setting This display may also be used to display diagnostic information if needed e SC Short Circuit to Ground e Sb Short to Battery e CF Controller Fault If this message appears on the display see your authorized dealer When the vehicle brakes are applied the display will no longer show GAIN and will change to the output to the trailer brakes Manual Brake Control Lever Slide the manual brake control lever to the right to activate power to the trailer s electric brakes independent of the tow vehicle s brakes If the manual brake control ee STARTING AND OPERATING 559 lever is activated while the brake is also applied the greater of the two inputs determines the power sent to the trailer brakes The trailer and the vehicle s brake lamps will come on when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are applied Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light This light indicates the trailer electrical connection status If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition is turned on
501. s pin if the strap breaks Next have the tow vehicle backup leaving two to three feet worth of slack in the strap Then the tow vehicle using light throttle should accelerate tighten ing the strap providing the pulling force needed to free the vehicle The vehicle being recovered should assist in the recovery at the time of the snap by slowly ee STARTING AND OPERATING 447 spinning the tires in the same direction as the pulling vehicle After the vehicle becomes free the driver of the previously stuck vehicle should signal they are free and should hit their brakes stopping both vehicles The driver of the pulling vehicle should let off the throttle without using the brakes once signaled by the other driver This sequence is important to avoid having the recovered vehicle hit the pulling vehicle WARNING Never use tow straps with end hooks or link two straps with a clevis pin These heavy metal objects could become projectiles if a strap breaks which could cause severe injury Never leave more than two or three feet of slack in the strap More slack than this greatly increases the risk of injury and vehicle dam age Always keep everyone at least 30 feet away from a strapping or winching situation e Winching Refer To Winch Operation For Addi tional Information Winching is most commonly used in the following situations there is no support vehicle available a high controlled force is required to recover the vehic
502. selected and press the TUNE control knob This will display the next sub menu list item on the audio device then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod or external USB device sub menu levels are available on this system MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your audio device ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 CAUTION Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the Leaving the iPod or external USB device or any Uconnect phone system supported device anywhere in the vehicle in Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or To get into the BTSA mode press either AUX button on damage the device Follow the device manufactur the radio or press the VR button and say Bluetooth er s guidelines NES Streaming Audio Placing items on the iPod or external USB device or connections to the iPod or external USB device Play Mode in the vehicle can cause damage to the device When switched to BTSA mode some audio devices can and or to the connectors start playing music over the vehicle s audio system but some devices require the music to be initiated on the device first then it will get streamed to the Uconnect WARNING phone system Seven devices can be paired to the Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external USB
503. set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 6 km h ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up e g during a parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF
504. sition In the AXLE UNLOCK position the front and rear axles are unlocked In the REAR LOCK position the rear axle is locked In the FRONT REAR LOCK position the front and rear axles are locked NOTE Even when the axles are in the AXLE UNLOCK position the limited slip differential in the rear axle still provides torque biasing capability for moderate low traction environments During the command to lock the axle the indicator light will flash until the axle is locked After the lock command has been successfully executed the light will remain on solid To lock the rear axle place the vehicle in 4LO Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in Starting and Operat ing for further information Move the axle locker switch position to REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph 5 km h The RR indicator light will remain on when the rear axle is locked 430 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE Left to right wheel speed difference may be necessary to allow the axle to fully lock If the indicator light is flashing after placing the switch in the REAR LOCK or FRONT REAR LOCK position drive the ve hicle in a turn or on loose gravel to expedite the locking action WARNING Do not use the locked axle position for normal driving A locked front axle is intended for off road driving only Locking the front axle during on road driving will reduce the steering ability This could cause a collision and you may be seriously injur
505. sitioning which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the vehicle There are two possible Easy Entry Exit adjustments available e The seat cushion will move rearward approximately 2 5 in 60 mm if the starting position of the seat is UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 greater than or equal to 2 67 in 68 mm forward of the rear seat stop when the key is removed from the ignition switch The seat will then move forward approximately 2 5 in 60 mm when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position The seat will move to the position located 0 3 in 8 mm forward of the rear stop if the starting position is between 0 9 to 2 67 in 23 to 68 mm forward of the rear stop when the key is removed from the ignition switch The seat will move forward to the memory driving position when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position toward the ACC ON position The Easy Entry Exit feature will be automatically dis abled if the seat is already positioned closer than 0 9 in 23 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit Entry 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry Exit position NOTE The Easy Entry Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory The Easy Entry Exit feature is enabled or la
506. smission gear and will display that gear in the instrument cluster as 4 3 2 1 Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precau tion turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade 382 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss WARNING WARNING Continued e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for e tis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever clockwise without first pull ing it toward you column shift or rearward with the brake pedal released floor shift after you have placed it in PARK Make s
507. snow try spinning your tires during this process to clean the debris from the tread and improve the traction You want to create a rocking motion with the vehicle This helps build vehicle momentum which hopefully gets you out Remember to ease off and on the accelerator before and after the shift If after a few rock cycles your vehicle is not free stop and try another method of recovery Continuous rock cycling will only cause unnecessary damage to your vehicle and the environment CAUTION Damage can occur when spinning your tires at an excessive high speed Do not spin your tires faster than an indicated 35 mph 56 km h e Using The Tow Hooks With A Tow Strap Tow straps are a quick and easy way to recover your vehicle from minor situations if you have a secondary vehicle which is not stuck The tow hooks on your vehicle are designed to take the abusive force gener ated during vehicle recovery Do not use the bumper or any other vehicle component as an attachment point Using tow straps requires coordination between the two drivers Good communication and line of sight are required for a safe recovery First connect the tow strap to the correct attachment points on both vehicles There should be a least 20 to 30 feet between the vehicles to allow for a safe recovery If necessary join two tow straps together using a 1 1 2 inch hard wood dowel This will keep the straps from becoming knot ted and is safer than using a clevi
508. source DVD will not show the video on the screen When selecting a video source on Channel 1 the video will display on the screen and the audio could be heard on Channel 1 in the headphones Audio can be heard through the headphones even when the Video Screen is closed Play A DVD Using The Touch Screen Radio 1 Press the OPEN CLOSE or LOAD hard key on the radio faceplate Touch Screen 2 Insert the DVD with the label facing up The radio automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts playing the first track 3 To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passen gers ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 1 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Using The Remote Control 1 Press the MODE button on the Remote Control 2 While looking at Screen 1 highlight DISC by either pressing Up Down Left Right buttons or by repeatedly pressing the MODE button then press ENTER EE Select Mode 2 ET AM DISC WEATHER FM AUX SAT Ves DISC HDD Ves AUX1 Ves AUX2 Enter to Select B Q MUTE Preset 10 WEATHER hi The Weather Channel Fa The Weather Channel Fd Mother Nature 00 00 Select DISC Mode On The VES Screen NOTE e Channel Screen 1 select mode information is shown on the left side of the screen e Channel Screen 2 select mode information is shown on the right side of the screen Using The Touch Screen Ra
509. ss of vehicle control pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE Never use a tire with a smaller load index or INFORMATION IF EQUIPPED capacity other than what was originally equipped A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passen on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load gers 150 Ibs 68 kg each plus 200 lbs 91 kg of cargo index could result in tire overloading and failure Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle You could lose control and have a collision will be found on the face of the driver s door CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Continued 512 STARTING AND OPERATING Se TIRE CHAINS Use Class S chains or other traction aids that meet SAE Type S specifications Use Class U chains on 2500 3500 model trucks or other traction aids that meet SAE Type U specifica tions NOTE Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain manufacturer CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle tires
510. steering damper In addition this vehicle is equipped with boxed cross members and fore aft rails This addi tional protection allows the vehicle to be utilized in severe off road situations that would be considered im passable by a normal truck Ramp Travel Index RTD The ramp travel index is the distance in inches that you can drive your vehicle with one wheel on a 20 degree ramp without lifting any other wheel off the ground This 434 STARTING AND OPERATING Se distance up the ramp divided by the wheelbase of the vehicle and multiplied by 1 000 is the RTI This vehicle has an RTI of 655 which means you can articulate one front wheel 32 inches in the air while the other three wheels remain in contact with the ground Water Fording Characteristics Water fording characteristic is the vehicle s ability to cross a body of still water where the powertrain and drivetrain are safe from water ingestion This vehicle has high water fording characteristics with the ability to cross a pool of water without stopping 24 inches deep at a maximum speed of 10 mph 16 km h and a pool of water 30 inches deep at a maximum speed of 5 mph 8 km h both with an entrance ramp angle of 1 3 degrees CAUTION The door sill height is 25 inches Water may intrude into the interior of the vehicle at greater depths Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation Many off road driving conditions require the simultane ous use of the brake and thr
511. stem light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies e Electronic Speed Control Light 4 This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON e Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required You may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing e Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi CUR tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this i
512. swer Or Reject An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the amp e button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Press the amp e button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the amp ve button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this sectio
513. system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con trol device and may seriously reduce engine per formance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637 Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of
514. t cluster will illuminate ee STARTING AND OPERATING 479 NOTE WARNING e When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound the parking brake Always apply the parking to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle before attempting to move the vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous fora number of reasons A child or others could be This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking ona hill it is important to turn the front seriously Or fatally injured wheels toward the curb ona downhill grade and away Do not leave the key fob in the vehicle A child from the curb on an uphill grade Apply the parking could operate power windows other controls or brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise move the vehicle the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision Conti
515. t from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not ra diator antifreeze When refilling the washer fluid reser voir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean This will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635 WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution After the engine has warmed up operate the defroster for a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the cold windsh
516. t from Step 2 5 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button The EVIC will display CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If you unplugged the garage door opener device for programming plug it back in at this time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the EVIC displays CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Canadian Gate Operator Programming Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the programmed device i e garage door opener gate opera tor security system entry door lock home office light ing etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To erase the channels press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display CLEARING CHANNELS Release the buttons when the EVIC displays CHANNELS CLEARED The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled wh
517. t lever into the PARK position unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be When shifting into PARK pull the column mounted seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key shift lever toward you and move it all the way fob in the vehicle A child could operate power counterclockwise until it stops For console mounted windows other controls or move the vehicle shifter move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops 384 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe e Release the shift lever and make sure it is fully seated in the PARK gate e Look at the shift lever position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position e With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle rearward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving f
518. t running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old engine coolant antifreeze solution ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 639 Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper CAUTION Continued maintenance intervals e Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine Selection Of Coolant coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu may not be compatible with the engine coolant ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further antifreeze and may plug the radiator information CAUTION e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corro This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylen
519. t the entire belt from the retractor and Second Row N A N A N A then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic e N A Not Applicable Locking Mode e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ss Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR 1 To install a child restraint with ALR first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Next extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor As the belt retracts you will hear a ratcheting sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode 2 Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary Installing a Child Restraint with a Cinching Latch Plate 1 To install a child restraint with a cinching latch plate first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 2 Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will
520. tach the hook strap Hold the hook strap between the thumb and forefinger to keep tension on the wire rope Walk the wire rope towards the fairlead carefully spooling in the remaining wire rope By pulsing the remote control switch 19 Store the hook on the most outboard loop of the tow hook 81c10314 20 Disconnect the remote control Disconnect the remote control cord from the control box and store in a clean and dry place Winching operations are now complete Put the cap on the solenoid plug in NOTE Always store the remote control in a protected clean dry area 474 STARTING AND OPERATING M Rigging Techniques How To Change The Pulling Direction Various winching situations will require application of other winching techniques These could range from too little distance to achieve maximum pull using straight line rigging simply increasing pulling power or main taining a straight line pulling situation You will have to assess what technique is correct for your situation Think safety at all times 814a0e01 Change Pulling Directions ee STARTING AND OPERATING All winching operations should have a straight line from the winch to the object being pulled This minimizes the wire rope collecting on one side of the drum affecting pulling efficiency and damaging wire rope A snatch block secured to a point directly in front of the vehicle will enable you to change your pulling direction while still allowing th
521. tainer Nut 3 Utility Rail Cleat 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SLIDE IN CAMPERS Camper Applications Certain truck models are not recommended for slide in campers To determine if your vehicle is excluded please refer to the Consumer Information Truck Camper Load ing document available from your authorized dealer For safety reasons follow all instructions in this impor tant document NOTE When a cap or pickup camper is installed on a vehicle an alternate Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL must be provided EASY OFF TAILGATE To simplify mounting of a camper unit with an overhang the tailgate can be removed NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a rear camera the electrical connector must be disconnected prior to removing the tailgate Disconnecting the Rear Camera If Equipped 1 Open the tailgate to access the rear camera connector bracket located on the rear sill 036906361 Connector Bracket 2 Remove the connector bracket from the sill by press ing inward in the locking tab UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 5 Connect the tailgate plug provided in the glove box to the tailgate wiring harness to ensure that the terminals do not corrode 6 Tape the tailgate harness and bracket against the ai forward facing surface of the tailgate This will prevent damaging the connector and bracket when storing or m reinstalling the tailgate Removing The Ta
522. tback Storage fully open the lid Located in the back of both the driver and passenger front seats are pockets that can be used for storage Opened Storage Bin l 035205816 Drivers Side Seatback Storage 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Storage Regular Cab Storage and Seats Crew Cab The storage bin is located behind the front seats and runs The Crew Cab models provide additional storage under the length of the cab the rear seats Lift the seats to access the storage com partment To open the storage compartments lift upward on the handle of the latch and open the lid Storage Bin 035205817 l Crew Cab Storage UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 CAUTION Always lift the storage compartment lids by using the handle Failure to lift the lids by using the handle can result in damage to the lids Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers Regular Cab Models Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag handles are built into the back panel of the cab behind the rear seat 035207311 Grocery Bag Hooks 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M REAR WINDOW FEATURES CAUTION Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control panel Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear
523. te end on a towing dolly case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer when towing case is operable the vehicle may be towed in the forward direction with ALL wheels on the ground IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL and the transmission is in PARK Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating for further information Failure to follow these towing methods can cause severe damage to the transmission and or transfer case Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E Engine Compartment 3 7L 620 W Maintenance Procedures H Engine Compartment 4 7L 621 PCIe OW i3 uaa dug Se Pacis H Engine Compartment 5 7L 622 Engine Oll DB uu dar ce x exa lll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II 623 Engine Air Cleaner Filter Lus Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 623 Maintenance Free Battery ll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Air Conditioner Maintenance Programs unes nea RG han Re a 624 Front Driveshaft Lubrication 2500 3800 Bl Replacement Parts n on nannaa aaua 625 Four Wheel Drive Models B Dealer Service oer Ron eds 626 a a owes Body Lubrication 1 4 emere tr m
524. tellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof aro
525. tely or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 708 INDEX eee Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 639 Adding Fuel p iuuat nls anges 540 Adjustable Pedals scce i4s30 Ros 173 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 630 Air Conditioner Maintenance 632 Air Conditioning cs cesse euer tie ans 356 Air Conditioning Controls 356 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 632 633 Air Conditioning System 356 360 632 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 367 Air Pressure Tires 0 0000 cues 503 511 AirbaS ucxeag cce aea dds b GO ea Esi eo 56 65 Airbag Deployment llle sss 66 Airbag Light 000 63 64 69 87 265 Airbag Maintenance 2 0 000 0 pis ios 68 Airbag Sid sk e eee as 59 62 64 65 Airbag Window Side Curtain 60 62 65 Alarm Security Alarm 05 19 Alarm Light grepene oath Beard tk 254 Alarm System Security Alarm 19 Alarm Panic 0 0 0 ce een 24 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio lesse 310 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 481 Anti Lock Warning Light llus 265 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 19 Anti Theft System 2 0 0 2 cee 19 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 639 674 Disposal sito sit oot boyy th hace Pay ondes 641
526. tem in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position Pull the shift lever toward you when shifting into REVERSE or PARK or when shifting out of PARK The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers 402 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears The transmission shift lever has only PARK REVERSE NEUTRAL and DRIVE shift positions Manual down shifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control refer to Electronic Range Select ERS in this section Pressing the ERS switches on the shift lever while in the DRIVE position will select the highest available transmission gear and will display that gear in the instrument cluster as 6 5 4 3 2 1 Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in moti
527. ter and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with integral ignition switch You can insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch with either side up Standard Blade Ignition Key If Equipped Your vehicle may use a standard blade key ignition system The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized dealer Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place You can insert the double sided standard blade key into the ignition switch with either side up Wireless Ignition Node WIN If Equipped The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similar to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three with detents and one that is spring loaded The detent posi tions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When released from the START position the switch automati cally returns to the ON RUN position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 AEE AEE EEEE EEEE Wireless Ignition Node WIN 1 OFF 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN 4 START Key Fob The Key Fob operates the ignition switch Insert the square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired posi tion It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in
528. ter disabled through the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood two latches must be released 1 Pull the hood release lever located below the steering wheel at the base of the instrument panel Hood Release ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 2 Reach into the opening beneath the center of the hood CAUTION and push the safety latch lever from right to left to release it before raising the hood To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the front center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death 031305523 Safety Latch 1500 Series Shown 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M LIGHTS The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel next to the steering wheel The head light switch controls the operation of the headlights parking lights instrument panel lights cargo lights and fog lights if equipped NS E H
529. ter you need to determine if you can cross it safely and responsibly If necessary get out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick You need to be sure of its depth approach angle current and bottom condition Be careful of murky or muddy waters check for hidden obstacles Make sure you will not be intruding on any wildlife and you can recover the vehicle if necessary The key to a safe crossing is the water depth current and bottom con ditions On soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle Be sure to consider this when determining the depth and the ability to safely cross Crossing Puddles Pools Flooded Areas Or Other Standing Water Puddles pools flooded or other standing water areas normally contain murky or muddy waters These water types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an accurate water depth approach angle and bottom condition Murky or muddy water holes are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering This makes for a faster cleaner and easier vehicle recovery If you are able to determine you can safely cross than proceed using the low and slow method CAUTION Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effec tiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator 444 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e Crossing Ditches Streams Shallow Rivers Or Other and if there are any obstacles then cross at an angle Fl
530. terference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors ee STARTING AND OPERATING 525 The EVIC will also display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault possibly related to an incorrect sensor location fault is present In this case the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is then followed by a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates that the pres sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be in the correct vehicle position The system still needs to be serviced as long as the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message exists Vehicles With Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON In addition the EVIC will display a low pressure message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value flashing 3 After driving the vehicle f
531. terials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel 654 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery
532. the Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker Dual Rear Wheels If bulb Equipped 3 Pull the bulb straight out from the socket 1 Loosen the two screws and the housing to gain access 4 Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and to the bulb sockets housing ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 673 Side Marker Lamps Dual Rear Wheels If 1 Push rearward on the side marker lamp assembly Equipped 2 Pull the entire assembly from the fender 3 Turn the socket 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove from assembly to access the bulb 4 Pull the bulb straight out from socket 5 Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and housing sns 674 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 1500 Regular Cab Shortbed Crew Quad Cab Models 26 Gallons 98 Liters 1500 Regular Cab Longbed Crew Quad Cab Models 32 Gallons 121 Liters Optional 2500 3500 Shortbed Models 34 Gallons 129 Liters 2500 3500 Longbed Models 35 Gallons 132 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 5 Quarts 4 7 Liters 4 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 6 Quarts 5 7 Liters 5 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 7 Quarts 6 6 Liters 5 7L Engine SAE 5W 30 API Certified For 2500 7 Quarts 6 6 Liters 3500 trucks operating under a gross combined weight rating greater than 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 675
533. the latch plate and pull To remove slack pull the loose end of the webbing Wear the lap belt snug against the hips Sit back and erect in the seat then adjust the belt as tightly as is comfortable E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 WARNING Driver Center Passenger A lap belt ino Nichdsd First Row N A N A ALR e e A belt wom too loose can allow you to slip down SMa Rew AR Coh AIR you and under the belt in a collision Third Row N A N A N A e A belt that is too loose or too high will apply crash N A Not Applicable forces to the abdomen not to the stronger hip A Lp cic e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor bones In either case the risk of internal injuries is greater Wear a lap belt low and snug For Regular Cab Only Driver Center Passenger Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions First Bow N A ALR ALR The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are c ond Row N A N A N A equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For N A Not Applicable additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se If the passenger seating posi
534. the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will displa
535. the front and rear seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING controls for each seat are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel below the climate controls die e d t feel i to P You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings CAUSE 0s dO ane aes CONLE 1s ener PIOUStes Aqberindibatur lights in each switch indicate the level of spinal cord injury medication alcohol use X heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for haustion or other physical condition must exercise HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a sec ond time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat NOTE e Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within Front Heated Seats two to five minutes There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver i e The engine must be running for the heated seats to and passenger to operate t
536. the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position the light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped for further information 8 4WD Indicator This light indicates the vehicle is in four wheel AWD drive and 4LOCK 4WD allows all four wheels to receive torque from the engine simultane ously 9 4WD Auto Indicator The 4WD auto indicator will be illuminated whenever the four wheel drive mode is auto matically engaged 4WD AUTO 10 SVC Service 4WD The SVC 4WD light monitors the electric shift SVC four wheel drive system If the SVC 4WD light 4wD stays on or comes on during driving it means that the four wheel drive system is not func tioning properly and that servic
537. the load NOTE How to choose an anchor point A secure anchor is critical to winching operations An anchor must be strong enough to hold while winching Natural an chors include trees stumps and rocks Hook the cable as low as possible If no natural anchors are available when recovering another vehicle your vehicle becomes the anchor point In this case be sure to put the transmission in NEUTRAL apply the hand brake and block its wheels to prevent your vehicle from moving Ideally you ll want an anchor point that will enable you to pull straight in the direction the vehicle will move This allows the wire rope to wind tightly and evenly onto the spooling drum An anchor point as far away as possible will provide the winch with its greatest pulling power 7 Attach the Clevis D shackle and Tree Trunk Protector Attach the shackle to the two ends of the strap or chain and through the hook loop being careful not to over tighten tighten and back off 1 2 turn 8149d116 Clevis D Shackles 8 Lock the clutch Lock the winch drum by rotating the clutch lever on the winch to engage 468 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE Always ensure the clutch is fully engaged or disengaged 9 Connect the remote control to the winch control box located behind the front bumper Be careful not to let the remote control cord dangle in front of the winch If you choose to control the winch from inside your vehicle always pass the remote t
538. the max load inflation pressure cold values described on the Tire and Loading Informa tion label The Tire and Loading Information label is located on the drivers side B pillar If the tire light load inflation switch LED turns OFF the TPMS has been reset and the TPMS is using the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning thresholds General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow ing licenses United States cds ses eee MRXC4W4MA4 Canada 2546A C4W4MA4 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 7L and 4 7L Engine These engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excel 87 lent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded regular 800diab6 gasoline having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recom mended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines 5 7L Engine RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89 The manufac
539. the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock
540. the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap can become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safet
541. thorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Electronic Range Select ERS Operation The Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position For example if you shift the transmission into 3 third gear the transmission will never shift above third gear but will shift down into second and first gear normally Use of ERS or TOW HAUL mode also enables an additional underdrive gear which is not normally used during through gear accelerations This additional gear can improve vehicle performance and cooling capability when towing a trailer on certain grades In ERS mode gears 1 though 3 are underdrive gears and ERS 4 is direct drive ERS 5 and 6 Overdrive gears are the same as the normal fourth and fifth gears You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between all available gears Tapping the ERS switch column shift or the shift lever to the left console shift will activate ERS mode display the current gear in the instrument cluster and maintain that gear as the top available gear For example if you are in DRIVE and are in third direct gear when you tap the shift lever switch one time in the
542. thout reading and understanding the com plete winch owner s manual Tensioning The Wire Rope The winch rope must be properly tensioned before use Follow the instructions below to tension the rope 1 Un spool the wire rope leaving five wraps of rope on the winch drum 2 Attach the hook to a suitable anchor point CAUTION Be certain the anchor will withstand the load re quired to tension the wire rope 3 Apply at least 500 Ibs 227 kg of tension to the rope while winding the rope Always use care to ensure the rope does not pile up on one side of the drum and is neatly wound onto the drum ee STARTING AND OPERATING 457 CAUTION Wire rope must spool on the winch drum in the direction indicated on the drum rotation decal on the winch Low Voltage Interrupt Your winch is equipped with a device that will interrupt winch function if the vehicle charging system voltage drops to a low level The winch will not power in or out for 30 seconds if this device is tripped If the interrupt is tripped the vehicle should be operated at high idle for a few minutes to allow the vehicle charging system to recover before continuing to winch Winch Motor Thermal Protection Your winch is equipped with a thermal protection device in the motor If the winch is operated for an excessive duration the device may interrupt motor function to protect the winch motor During this time the winch will power out but will not power in A
543. ting that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Operating conditions such as frequent short trips trailer tow extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures and E85 fuel usage will influence when the Change Oil message is displayed Depending on operating conditions the message may appear as early as 3 500 miles 5 630 km since last reset Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 681 NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel or under In s
544. tion list or select playback modes SCAN RANDOM for a CD 8 gt Play Pause Begin resume or pause disc play 9 m Stop Stops disc play 10 PROG Up Down When listening to a radio mode pressing PROG Up selects the next preset and pressing PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in the radio When listening to compressed audio on a data disc PROG Up selects the next directory and PROG Down selects the previous directory When listening to a disc in a radio with a multiple disc changer PROG Up selects the next disc and PROG Down selects the previ ous disc 11 MUTE Press to mute the headphone audio output for the selected channel 12 SLOW Press to slow playback of a DVD disc Press play FP to resume normal play 13 STATUS Press to display the current status 14 MODE Press to change the mode of the selected channel See the Mode Selection section of this manual for details on changing modes 15 SETUP When in a video mode press the SETUP button to access the display settings see the display settings section to access the DVD setup menu select the menu button on the radio When a disc is loaded in the DVD player if equipped and the VES mode is selected 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se and the disc is stopped press the SETUP button to access the DVD Setup menu see the DVD Setup Menu of this manual 16 BACK When navigating in menu mode press to return to the pr
545. tion is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Automatic Locking Retractor ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activ
546. transfer case in NEUTRAL N and the engine running With the transfer case in NEUTRAL N ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into PARK 13 Remove the key fob from the ignition switch 14 Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable tow bar 15 Release the parking brake Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL N Manual Shift Transfer Case If Equipped Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop leaving it con nected to the tow vehicle 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 3 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position but do not start the engine 4 Press and hold the brake pedal 5 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 6 Shift the transfer case lever to the desired position NOTE When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL N turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid gear clash ee STARTING AND OPERATING 575 7 Shift the transmission into PARK Shifting Into NEUTRAL Electronic Shift Transfer Case If Equipped Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for 9 Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle recreational towing 10 Start the engine WARNING 11 Press and hold the brake pedal 8 Release the brake pedal You or others could be injured if you leave the 12 Release the parking brake vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging th
547. trical tires and the white writing of the OWL tires will maintain proper position TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure 518 STARTING AND OPERATING Se The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure
548. trument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odom eter in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information At Each Stop For Fuel e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 682 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Ses Once A Month CAUTION e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required Required Maintenance Intervals e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake NOTE Vehicles built with the 4 7L engine are master cylinder and transmission and add as needed equipped with sixteen spark plugs One set is located on the top of the engine under the coils and the second set is e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct located on the side oF the engine as un E Hoo oe oe R 2 H ui RLUP E34 operation The spark plugs located under the coils are a standard At Each Oil Change plug and must be changed every 48 000 miles e Change the engine oil filter 78 000 km Hg I
549. trument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 040506040 Compass Variance Map 1 Turn the ignition switch ON Customer Programmable Features menu is reached then press the SELECT button 3 Press the DOWN button until the Compass Variance message is displayed in the EVIC then press the SELECT button The last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the BACK button to exit Customer Programmable Features System Setup Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK If the transmission is out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving a warning message SYSTEM SETUP NOT AVAILABLE is fol lowed in three seconds by VEHICLE NOT IN PARK ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 Press and release the UP or DOWN button until System Setup displays in the EVIC Press the SELECT button to enter the System Setup Sub Menu Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the following choices Select Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the UP or DOWN button while in t
550. ts must be properly installed if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 3 a Mirrors caos eor Rn RE S doers SR 98 Illuminated Vanity Mirror If Equipped 102 Inside Day Night Mirror 98 Slide On Rod F
551. tton to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All Names In The Uconnect Phonebook e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME e To call one of the names in the list press the t VR button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have An
552. turer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 700 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 866 726 4636 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1
553. u just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit Entry can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit Entry feature Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 from the list press the VR button while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete e After you enter the name the Uconnect Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile other or all Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Delete Erase All Uconnect Phonebook Entries e Press the amp bu
554. ubstantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers e Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible ee STARTING AND OPERATING 477 CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Veh
555. udible Alert None Single 1 2 Slow Fast Continuous Chime Second Tone Display Message Park Assist Warning Object Warning Object Warning Object Warning Object System ON Detected Detected Detected Detected Arcs None 3 Solid 3 Slow 2 Slow 1 Slow Continuous Flashing Flashing Flashing Radio Volume No Yes Yes Yes Yes NOTE ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio if on when the system is sounding an audio tone Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with a switch located in the switch bank of the instrument panel or through the Customer Programmable Features section of the EVIC The available choices are OFF Sound Only or Sound and Display Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 When the ParkSense switch is pressed to disable the system the instrument cluster will display the PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF mes sage for approximately five seconds Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE The ParkSense switch LED will be ON
556. ult audiences When a DVD Video disc is loaded its rating is compared to the setting in the DVD player If the rating of the disc is higher than the setting in the player a Password screen is displayed In order to watch the disc the rear passen ger must enter the correct password using the password entry method described below To play all discs without requiring a password set the DVD player s rating to Level 8 Setting the rating to Level 1 always requires the password to play any DVD disc Not all DVD discs encode a Rating so it is still possible that discs designed for adult audiences can still play without requiring a password The default rating is Level 8 play all discs without a password and the default password is 0000 Please input a 4 cigit password E k x Gel ENTER Cance LE ERETHRN DVD Password Entry UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351 To set the password activate the DVD Setup Menu and After the four digit password is entered press the follow these additional instructions remote control s ENTER button to accept the change e Using the remote control Left and Right cursor but tons select the Rating tab e Highlight Change Password and then press the remote control s ENTER button e Enter the current password Select a digit use the remote control Up and Down cursor buttons to set the value for the current digit and then press the remote control s Right curs
557. unctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 27 Air Bag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds 9 as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 28 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 29 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti lock Brake System amp e3 ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as p
558. und the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a seco
559. undesired operation VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Command System Operation This Voice Command system allows you to i VR control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death When you press the Voice Command ve button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the Voice Command CER button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the Voice Command EvR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and
560. unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC a chime will sound to remind you to remove the Key Fob NOTE e The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition position e If equipped with Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC the EVIC will display Key In Ignition SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses a Key Fob with a factory mated Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and Wireless Ignition Node WIN to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 NOTE AKey Fob that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key During normal operation after turning on t
561. ure the transmis sion is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 383 WARNING Continued CAUTION e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure e Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK OFF you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is position to the ON RUN position and also press running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and remove the key fob Once the key fob is removed the shift lever is locked in the PARK the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle The following indicators should be used to ensure that Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving you have engaged the shif
562. urer Operating instructions for the special equipment in stalled by the conversion camper manufacturer should also be supplied with your vehicle If these instructions are missing please contact your authorized dealer for assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the applicable manufacturer For information on the Body Builders Guide refer to www dodgebodybuilder com This website contains di mensional and technical specifications for your vehicle It is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer s technical support For service issues contact your authorized dealer VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also appears on the bottom of the frame rail on the right hand side near the center of the vehicle and underbody as well as the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and title INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING M Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death Vehicle Identification Number NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll A Word About Your Keys
563. urned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an autho rized dealership for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Main taining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 5 Speedometer The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per hour and or kilometers per hour mph km h 6 4LOW This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four wheel drive LOW mode The front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked to gether forcing the front and rear wheels to 4 LOW 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss rotate at the same speed Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels For further information on four wheel drive operation and proper use refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation If Equipped in Starting And Operating 7 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If
564. used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ REL RET radios only with Uconnect For sales cod
565. uster indicates the transmission gear range The shift lever is mounted either on the right side of the steering column if equipped or on the console if equipped You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of the PARK position refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position Pull the shift lever toward you when shifting into REVERSE or PARK or when shifting out of PARK column shift only The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers ee STARTING AND OPERATING 381 Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears The transmission shift lever has only PARK REVERSE NEUTRAL and DRIVE shift positions Manual down shifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control described later in this section Press ing the ERS switches column shift or moving the shift lever to the left or right console shift while in the DRIVE position will select the highest available tran
566. usty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 104 000 miles 169 000 km Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only T Lube the front drive shaft fitting J Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 2500 3500 4x4 models only J Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for T Flush and replace the engine coolant at damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary 104 000 miles 169 000 km or 60 months whichever comes first M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center 692 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Ses 120 000 Miles 195 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 120 000 miles 195 000 km Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s a
567. ut the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 702 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm
568. uter wheels Align these slots when assem bling the wheels for best access to the tire valve on the inner wheel The tires of both dual wheels must be completely off the ground when tightening to ensure wheel centering and maximum wheel clamping Dual wheel models require a special heavy duty lug nut tightening adapter included with the vehicle to cor rectly tighten the lug nuts Also when it is necessary to remove and install dual rear wheels use a proper vehicle lifting device NOTE When installing a spare tire as part of a dual rear wheel end combination the tire diameter of the two individual tires must be compared If there is a significant difference the larger tire should be installed in a front location The correct direction of rotation for dual tire installations must also be observed These dual rear wheels should be tightened as follows 060505400 Tightening Pattern 1 Tighten the wheel nuts in the numbered sequence to a snug fit ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 603 2 Retighten the wheel nuts in the same sequence to the torques listed in the table Go through the sequence a second time to verify that specific torque has been achieved Retighten to specifications at 100 miles 160 km and after 500 miles 800 km It is recommended that wheel stud nuts be kept torqued to specifications at all times Torque wheel stud nuts to specifications at each lubrication interval To Stow The Flat Or Spare NOTE
569. utside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse affect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact 652 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Insects tree sap and tar e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish CAUTION e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve f hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or equiva such as steel wool or scouring powder which will lent or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels Serres metal and painted surkacd completely with clear water e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu paint and decals lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar
570. uttons 1 and 2 can be programmed to recall the driver s seat position driver s outside mirror position adjustable brake accelerator pedals position and radio station preset settings Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed NOTE The power lumbar option is not programmable with driver memory seats Your vehicle was delivered with two RKE transmitters One or both RKE transmitters can be linked to either memory position The memory system can accommodate up to two RKE transmitters each RKE transmitter linked to either of the two memory positions Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE Transmitter To Memory NOTE Each time the S SET button and a numbered button 1 or 2 are pressed you erase the memory settings for that button and store a new one ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 1 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if you are setting the memory for driver 1 or button number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2 The system will recall any stored settings Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3 3 Adjust the driver s seat recliner and driver s sideview mirror to the desired positions 4 Adjust the power adjustable pedals if equipped to the desired positions 5 Turn
571. vice information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627 CAUTION Continued e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance impr
572. ving At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be tween the fingertips To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly the following procedure must be used 1 Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating temperature 2 The vehicle must be on level ground 650 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake pedal 4 Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi tion ending with the lever in PARK 5 Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated 6 Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat ing temperature Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on both sides of the dipstick If the fluid is low add as required into the dipstick tube Do not overfill After adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level NOTE If itis necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two COLD lower holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approximately 70 F 21 C room tem perature If the fluid level is correctly established at room temperature it should be between the HOT upper reference holes when the trans
573. when ParkSense is disabled or defective The ParkSense switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled Pya OFF Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System When the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System is mal functioning the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS or the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition the EVIC will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS or the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Under this condition ParkSense will not operate If CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC make sure the rear fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the igni tion If the message continues to appear see an autho rized dealer If SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM appears in the EVIC see your authorized dealer 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could
574. while the ignition is OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off NOTE Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is ON Daytime Running Lights DRL If Equipped The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the engine is started and the transmission is in any gear except PARK This provides a constant Lights ON condition until the ignition is turned OFF The lights illuminate at less than 50 of normal intensity If the parking brake is applied the Daytime Running Lights DRL will turn OFF Also if a turn signal is activated the DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle may turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation Once the turn signal is no longer active the DRL lamp will illuminate Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 031464208 Turn Signal Lever NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn sign
575. will prompt you to say the name or Bees TODAS anaes number of the person you wish to send the message to 12 I am on my way List of Preset Messages 13 TII be late 1 Yes 14 Are you there yet 2 No 15 Where are we meeting 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se 16 Can this wait 17 Bye for now 18 When can we meet 19 Send number to call 20 Start without me Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON OFF Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop the system from announcing the new incoming mes sages e Press the Se button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup SMS Incoming Message Announcement you will then be given a choice to change it Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Voice Tree Main Menu Recent Towing English Uconnect Calls all Dial Redial Assistance Emergency Espanol Phonebook Setup OTU BHSIEY SMS Francais Last See
576. will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones
577. window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window defroster only when the engine is operating window NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear Keep all objects a safe distance from the window Power Sliding Rear Window If Equipped The switch for the power sliding rear window is located on the overhead console Rear Window Switch Push the switch to the right to open the glass Pull the switch to the left to close the glass UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 Manual Sliding Rear Window If Equipped A locking device in the center of the window helps to prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle Squeeze the lock to release the window FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR IF EQUIPPED Quad Cab and Crew Cab models with a 60 40 rear seat may be equipped with a folding load floor WARNING Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on the l
578. with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE e When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho rized dealer e If a programmed Key Fob is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining Key Fobs erased from the system s memory This will prevent the lost Key Fobs from starting your vehicle The remaining Keys Fobs must then be reprogrammed Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors and ignition for unauthorized operation When the Ve hicle Security Alarm is activated interior switches for door lock
579. with outside temperature display the display may show higher temperatures than the outside ambient tempera ture The higher displayed temperature is due to blocked or reduced airflow to the underhood ambient tempera ture sensor caused by the snowplow In addition on vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Control ATC it is suggested that the interior cabin temperature be manually controlled should the system not perform as desired while in automatic mode Both the outside tem perature display and ATC operation will return to nor mal when the snowplow is removed General Maintenance Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with the plow manufacturer s instructions Keep all snowplow electrical connections and battery terminals clean and free of corrosion When plowing snow to avoid transmission and drive train damage the following precautions should be ob served e Operate with transfer case in 4L when plowing small or congested areas where speeds are not likely to exceed 15 mph 24 km h At higher speeds operate in 4H 570 STARTING AND OPERATING Emm e Vehicles with automatic transmissions should use 4L range when plowing deep or heavy snow for extended periods of time to avoid transmission overheating e Do not shift the transmission unless the engine has returned to idle and wheels have stopped Make a practice of stepping on the brake pedal before shifting the transmission RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND
580. ws the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press for approximately two seconds and release the ODOMETER TRIP ODOMETER button once to clear the resettable function being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and release the ODOMETER TRIP ODOMETER button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function Reset ALL will display during this three second window Vehicle Info Customer Information Features Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Info displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the available information displays then press SELECT to display any one of the following choices e Coolant Temp Displays the actual coolant temperature Oil Pressure Displays the actual oil pressure e Trans Temperature If Equipped Displays the actual transmission temperature e Trailer Brake If Equipped Displays trailer brake output power and trailer brake status indicator e Engine Hours Displays the number of hours of engine operation ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 Tire PSI NOTE Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Tire e Tires heat up during normal dr
581. y the display may show higher temperatures than the outside ambient tempera ture The higher displayed temperature is due to blocked or reduced airflow to the underhood ambient tempera ture sensor caused by the snowplow In addition on vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Control ATC it is suggested that the interior cabin temperature be manually controlled should the system not perform as desired while in automatic mode Both the outside tem perature display and ATC operation will return to nor mal when the snowplow is removed Manual Heating And Air Conditioning System The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions 045664090 4 DEFROST Mode 1 Front Blower 2 Temperature Control 3 MODE Control 5 Air Conditioning A C 6 RECIRCULATION Control es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357 Front Blower Control There are four blower speeds Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the OFF position NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the OFF position Temperature Control Use this control t
582. y belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rearward facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat Both types of child restraints are 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchor system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH WARNING Rearward facing child seats must never be used in the front seat of a vehicle with
583. y cause window fogging 366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Vacation Storage Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in fresh air with the blower setting in high This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging and Frosting Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in mild rainy and or humid weather Windows may frost on the inside of the glass in very cold weather To clear the windows select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed Do not use the Recirculation mode without A C for long periods as fogging may occur Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow can cause odor and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367 Operating Tips WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS gt e Hot weather and pes Teinie Set the mode control to vehicle interior is very on and blower on high Roll down the windows for a minute to flush out the hot air Once comfort is achieved adjust controls for comfort e Set
584. y extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if so equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use the seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Supplemental Resiraint System SRS Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers 022663663 Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 2 Knee Bolster 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags NOTE These air bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Air Bags en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to
585. y leak from the transmission causing damage to internal parts 572 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Recreational Towing Four Wheel Drive Models CAUTION Continued Automatic transmissions must be placed in the PARK position for recreational towing Before recreational towing perform the procedure outlined under Shifting Into NEUTRAL N to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEU TRAL N Otherwise internal damage will result Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Damage from improper tow NOTE Both the manual shift and electronic shift trans fer cases must be shifted into NEUTRAL N for recre ational towing Automatic transmissions must be shifted into PARK for recreational towing Refer to the following for the proper transfer case NEUTRAL N shifting procedure for your vehicle CAUTION e Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing Tow only in the forward direction Towing this vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer case Continued ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid will leak from the transfer case causing damage to internal parts Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehic
586. y song titles for each file es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Sa
587. y upon initial start up in very hot Air Outlets e The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection by pressing the A C button or humid weather The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control NOTE i airflow e If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed when the system is in Mix or Defrost mode the Recirculation NOTE For maximum airflow to the rear the center LED indicator will flash three times and then turn off instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear to indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed seat passengers e Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended 360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Economy Mode If ECONOMY mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the LED indicator and the A C compressor Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired temperature Air Conditioning Operation Push this button to engage the Air Conditioning A C A LED will illu minate when the A C system is engaged MAX A C For maximum cooling when MAX A C is selected the A C is turned on automatically and the air is recircu lated NOTE A C cannot be deselected when in MAX A C position The LED will blink three times if the A C button is pushed Automatic Temperature Control ATC If
588. you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions except the Quad Cab Mega Cab and Crew Cab front center seating position have combi nation lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or accidents This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you WARNING Continued striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your WARNING vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and belts are designed to go around the large bones of using a seat belt properly your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the
589. you have another vehicle to help Is there high risk of vehicle damage during the recovery process Answering these questions will help you determine the best method of recovery If you can still move the vehicle slightly and the only issue is slick ground then rock cycling your vehicle would be the first choice If you have ample room an additional vehicle and there is low risk of vehicle impingement on the surroundings then using a tow strap to the vehicle tow hooks would be fast and easy If the vehicle is severely hung up or in a situation where great care needs to be taken during the recovery 446 STARTING AND OPERATING Se then nothing can do the job better than a winch If you are severely hung up on something you should jack the vehicle up and stack something under the wheels to allow the vehicle to roll off the object without causing further damage This should be tried before attempting any recovery method CAUTION Pulling the vehicle off an obstacle without first clearing the object may result in additional under body damage e Rock Cycling Your Vehicle Rock cycling your ve hicle is one of the easiest fastest and most commonly used methods This simply involves shifting your vehicle from DRIVE to REVERSE while applying throttle after each shift During this process for addi tional traction try turning your steering wheel quickly back and forth no more than a V4 turn If you are stuck in mud sand or
590. your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his her gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline 534 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and would result in unnecessary cost There fore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s perfor
591. ystem adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system 584 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never

2012 Ram Truck 1500/2500/3500 Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents